Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
March 2014
Emerson Process Management 1996 - 2014. All rights reserved. For Emerson Process Management trademarks and service marks,
go to Emerson Process Management Trademarks and Service Marks. All other marks are property of their respective owners. The
contents of this publication are presented for informational purposes only, and while every effort has been made to ensure their
accuracy, they are not to be construed as warranties or guarantees, expressed or implied, regarding the products or services
described herein or their use or applicability. All sales are governed by our terms and conditions, which are available on request. We
reserve the right to modify or improve the design or specification of such products at any time without notice.
Emerson a.s.
European System and Assembly
Pietansk 1202/44
Nov Mesto nad Vhom 91528
Slovakia
Contents
Welcome ......................................................................................................................vii
Chapter 1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 1
The DeltaV System .................................................................................................................................. 1
DeltaV System Equipment .......................................................................................................................2
DeltaV Control Network ...............................................................................................................3
DeltaV Remote Network .............................................................................................................. 6
Chapter 2 Installing Your DeltaV System ...................................................................................... 11
CE Statement ........................................................................................................................................ 12
Important Information about Hazardous Live Voltages ..........................................................................12
Installation Planning .............................................................................................................................. 12
Tools Required for Installation ................................................................................................... 13
Site Preparation ......................................................................................................................... 13
Wiring Guidelines ...................................................................................................................... 14
Power Guidelines ....................................................................................................................... 14
Torque Limits .............................................................................................................................14
Getting Started with DeltaV Hardware .......................................................................................15
Installing the System ............................................................................................................................. 16
Installing the DIN Rails and Carriers ............................................................................................16
DIN Rail Recommendations ....................................................................................................... 17
Installing the 2-Wide Power Controller Carrier ........................................................................... 18
Installing the 8-Wide I/O Interface Carrier .................................................................................. 19
Connecting Bussed Field Power ................................................................................................. 21
Extending Bussed Field Power ....................................................................................................22
Installing Extender Cables .......................................................................................................... 26
Installing the DeltaV I/O Interface .............................................................................................. 27
Installing the DeltaV Controller ..................................................................................................31
Installing the DeltaV System Power Supply ................................................................................ 32
Installing the DeltaV Workstation .............................................................................................. 36
Installing the DeltaV Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) .......................................................... 37
Setting up the DeltaV Control Network ......................................................................................37
Connecting Power to the System ............................................................................................... 43
Setting Up the DeltaV Remote Network .....................................................................................45
Setting Up a Network Time Server ............................................................................................. 46
Installing the Fault-Tolerant Server ............................................................................................ 47
Chapter 3 Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System ............................................... 49
Checking Out Your System .................................................................................................................... 49
Step 1. Checking the Cable Connections ....................................................................................49
Step 2. Checking the Power Supply Voltages ............................................................................. 50
Step 3. Checking the LED Indicators on Each Device ...................................................................50
Step 4. Testing the Field Wiring Connections ............................................................................. 81
Troubleshooting Your System ............................................................................................................... 82
Using the DeltaV Explorer .......................................................................................................... 82
Using the Workstation Diagnostics ............................................................................................ 83
Using DeltaV Diagnostics ...........................................................................................................83
Troubleshooting Guide .............................................................................................................. 84
i
Contents
ii
Contents
iii
Contents
iv
Contents
v
Contents
Index ................................................................................................................................................465
vi
Welcome
Preface
Welcome
Welcome to the Emerson Process Management DeltaV digital automation system. The
DeltaV system offers easy-to-install hardware and powerful, user-friendly software for
advanced process control scaled to the system size you need
This manual is designed to help you install your DeltaV system and get it started up
quickly. It is divided into three chapters, 15 appendices, a glossary, and an index.
Related Documentation
The Release Notes KBA has important updates for system installation.
Books Online contains a System Administration and Maintenance manual for help in
troubleshooting and the Installing Your DeltaV Zone 1 Intrinsically Safe Hardware manual.
The Site Preparation Guide for DeltaV Automation Systems contains instructions for properly
preparing your site for electrical power and grounding.
The Fieldbus Installations in a DeltaV Digital Automation System manual contains important
information about installing a fieldbus system.
The Installing Your DeltaV Safety Instrumented System Hardware manual contains
information about installing DeltaV SIS hardware.
vii
Welcome
Assumptions
It is assumed that you have read the Site Preparation Guide for DeltaV Automation Systems
and have followed the instructions for properly preparing your site for electrical power and
grounding before installing your DeltaV system. The Site Preparation Guide for DeltaV
Automation Systems is available from your Emerson Process Management representative or
sales office.
This manual, Installing Your DeltaV Digital Automation System, shows factory tested and
supported wiring connections. If your system requires a different configuration, contact
your Emerson Process Management representative or sales office for help with design or
review. It is assumed that all installation and maintenance procedures described in this
document are performed by qualified personnel and that the equipment is used only for
the purposes described
Conventions
WARNING!
A warning describes a critical procedure that must be followed to prevent a safety risk or
equipment damage.
CAUTION!
A caution describes a procedure that must be followed to prevent equipment malfunction.
Note
A note is a procedure, condition, or statement that will help you understand and operate your
system.
viii
Overview
1 Overview
Topics covered in this chapter:
The DeltaV System
DeltaV System Equipment
This chapter provides general information on the DeltaV system hardware. Refer to the
appendices for specifications and guidelines.
One or more I/O subsystems that process information from field devices
One or more controllers that perform local control and manage data and
communications between the I/O subsystem and the Control Network
Power supplies
One or more workstations that provide a graphical user interface to the process
A Control Network that provides communication between system nodes
1
Overview
Power Controller Carriers and I/O Interface Carriers that mount horizontally or
vertically on DIN rails. The number in the carrier name (such as 8-wide I/O interface
carrier) refers to the number of slots available for connecting the equipment to the
carrier. Refer to Appendix B for carrier specifications and to Appendix M for
information on vertical carriers.
LocalBus that consists of an internal power bus on the Power Controller Carrier,
busses on the associated I/O interface carriers, and connecting cables. The LocalBus
supplies power to the controller and the I/O subsystem and provides
communications connections between cards. System power (12 VDC) can be shared
along the length of the LocalBus. The length of the LocalBus, including all cabling,
cannot exceed 6.5 m (21.3 ft.). The LocalBus at this length can support eight, 8-wide
carriers, two, 2-wide carriers, and three carrier extenders. The length requirement is
the same for vertically mounted systems.
DeltaV I/O subsystem that includes I/O terminal blocks and I/O cards. Terminal
blocks snap onto the I/O interface carrier to provide screw terminations for field
wiring. I/O cards snap over the I/O terminal block on the carrier and convert field
signals to a digital format for control and communications. You can install the I/O
2
Overview
terminal blocks and connect field wiring before installing the other devices, thus
reducing installation and maintenance costs. Many of the DeltaV Series 2 cards
support redundancy. Series 2, redundant capable cards are configured, autosensed,
upgraded, and operated just like the pre-Series 2 cards. Series 2 simplex cards can
function as drop-in replacements for pre-Series 2 simplex cards of the same type.
Refer to Appendix C for more information on the I/O subsystem.
DeltaV Controller that performs local control and manages communication
between the I/O subsystem and the Control Network. It mounts on the right slot of
the 2-wide Power Controller carrier for horizontal installations and to the right of a
power supply on the 4-wide Power Controller carrier for vertical installations. You
can add an additional controller for controller redundancy. Refer to Appendix D for
DeltaV controller specifications.
DeltaV system power. The DeltaV system supports a system power supply (AC/DC)
and a system power supply (Dual DC/DC) as well as an Intrinsically Safe system
power supply. Refer to Appendix J for system power guidelines.
DeltaV Workstations that provide graphical user interfaces to help you configure
your system, perform extensive diagnostic checks, operate your process, and gather
reporting and historical data. The DeltaV System Identifier, shipped in your License
Pack, is a connector that plugs into the parallel printer port or Universal Serial Bus
(USB) on your ProfessionalPLUS workstation. It gives each DeltaV system a unique
identification that allows you to install or download changes to the system. The
system identifier is not required for the system to continue running or to restart the
system after it has been running. Refer to Appendix F for workstation specifications.
Fault-tolerant server that provides fault-tolerance through redundancy of the
major hardware sub-systems. The fault-tolerant server can be used as the hardware
platform for DeltaV Application stations. Refer to Appendix F for information on the
fault-tolerant server.
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) that backs up the DeltaV controller and the
DeltaV workstations during short-term power outages. The UPS allows the
controller and workstations to continue operating and to maintain current process
data when AC main power is down.
Bulk power supplies supply power to the system or to field devices. Power to the
system is isolated from power to field devices. Refer to Appendix H for legacy bulk
power supply specifications.
Related information
I/O Cards
System Power Guidelines
Workstation and Server Specifications
DeltaV Controllers and the Remote Interface Unit
DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies
3
Overview
The Control Network is dedicated to the DeltaV system. A separate Ethernet interface is
provided via the DeltaV ProfessionalPLUS and Application Station to connect the DeltaV
system to a plant-wide LAN. The primary way to connect a plant LAN to the DeltaV system
is through either or both the ProfessionalPLUS and Application station. The only way to run
non-DeltaV applications (other than Microsoft Excel) is through a DeltaV Application
Station.
CAUTION!
Connecting unapproved non-DeltaV equipment to the DeltaV Control Network can cause
unpredictable operation of the system.
The DeltaV Control Network has been designed to be redundant for communications
reliability. The Control Network is composed of Primary and Secondary communication
channels that are implemented with separate Ethernet NIC cards as well as separate
network hubs and switches for each channel.
Standard Category 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair (ScTP) cable must be used for Control
Networks with distances of up to 100 meters (328 feet) between Ethernet ports. Refer to
Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation Rules for cable specifications. For distances
of up 2 kilometers (6562 feet) between Ethernet ports, 19 inch rack-mounted switches
with a fiber-optic interface or small form factor switches with fiber-optic ports can be used.
Refer to DeltaV Fiber Switches for information on a small form factor switch with fiber-
optic ports. Be sure to specify the fiber-optic option when ordering the 19 inch rack-
mounted switch. Also, fiber-optic communication channels are preferable when:
Possible electromagnetic noise interference might exist and standard cable does not
provide sufficient protection.
Ground isolation and protection from near lightning strikes are required for building
to building communication links.
The following sections contain network diagrams that provide an overview of possible
network configurations for DeltaV systems. Refer to Appendix G Control Network
Specifications for detailed installation diagrams and instructions including requirements
for Ethernet shield orientations, rules for connecting switches in cascade and star
topologies, identification of fiber-optic and twisted pair cable connectors, switch
configuration, and other important installation requirements.
If your DeltaV system consists of one workstation and one controller only, you can connect
the DeltaV network without using a hub. The cable must be routed directly from the
workstation to the controller. Figure 1-3 shows an example of a no hub system. Refer to
Appendix G Control Network Specifications for the cable pinouts in a no hub system.
4
Overview
Note
The no-hub cable is for systems with no Control Network Hub. Its wiring is different from that of the
standard Ethernet cables used with DeltaV Control Network Hubs.
5
Overview
Related information
The DeltaV Remote Network is connected to the DeltaV system through a DeltaV
Application Station or the ProfessionalPLUS workstation running DeltaV Remote Access
Services (RAS) server. To support the engineering applications and the DeltaV Guardian
application on remote workstations and to upload displays from any workstation, the
remote network must also be connected to the ProfessionalPLUS workstation. To support
accessing batch data or to control batches from any workstation, the remote network
must also be connected to the Application station.
6
Overview
Note
The Application Station and ProfessionalPLUS nodes are not automatically designated as remote
servers during the installation process. If you enable remote network redundancy for your remote
nodes when you configure the workstation in DeltaV Explorer, you must also enable remote network
redundancy (in DeltaV Explorer) for the ProfessionalPLUS and any of the Application Station nodes
that are connected to the remote network. If remote network redundancy is not enabled, you will be
unable to view the data remotely if the Primary network connection is lost.
The DeltaV Remote Network can be simplex or redundant. Additional Ethernet interface
cards, separate from the control network interfaces, can be added to the Application
Station and ProfessionalPLUS workstations to support the DeltaV Remote Network.
The wiring and installation for the remote network should follow the same guidelines as
the control network.
The remote network is also designed to support various network connectivity options,
such as Microwave or leased line type connections as well as standard direct LAN
connections. When using a slow network link option, remote workstations can be
connected through a Remote Application Station. The Remote Application Station is
connected through an Application Station on the DeltaV Control Network. This type of
connection increases communication performance through the slow network link.
There are many possible remote network layouts for various system sizes and connection
options. Figure 1-6 shows a remote network dedicated to the DeltaV system. Both the
Application Station and the ProfessionalPLUS workstation are functioning as RAS servers.
Appendix G contains information on other switches supported by the DeltaV system.
7
Overview
Operator Operator
Primary
Pro Plus station station App station
control
network Secondary
control
network
Cisco 2950 Cisco 2950
twisted pair switch twisted pair switch
Figure 1-7 shows the use of a router to minimize network traffic between the DeltaV
system and a remote plant LAN. Both the Application Station and the ProfessionalPLUS
workstation are functioning as RAS servers. Appendix G contains information on other
switches supported by the DeltaV system.
8
Overview
Remote Remote
operator operator
station station
Plant LAN
Cisco 2950
twisted pair switch
Router
Cisco 2950
twisted pair switch
Secondary
control network
Related information
9
Overview
10
Installing Your DeltaV System
This chapter provides detailed instructions and diagrams for system installation. It includes
recommendations for planning the installation and provides a brief overview of the steps
required for system installation.
This chapter describes installations that are mounted vertically on horizontal carriers. For
installations that are mounted on vertical carriers, refer to Appendix M.
For Class I Division 2 installations, refer to the document DeltaV Scalable Process System,
Class I Division 2 Installation Instructions, (12P1293) on the DeltaV Documentation Library
DVD.
For Zone 2 installations, refer to the document DeltaV Scalable Process System, Zone 2
Installation Instructions, (12P2046) on the DeltaV Documentation Library DVD.
For NAMUR NE 21 installations, refer to the document DeltaV Digital Automation System
Namur NE 21 Installation Instructions, (12P2822) on the DeltaV Documentation Library
DVD.
For Marine Certified DeltaV installations, refer to the following installation requirements.
These requirements allow the DeltaV system to support the reduced EMC interference
requirements at the Marine Navigation Frequencies. Marine certification is approved for 24
V powered systems only. For additional requirements and for a list of the specific DeltaV
equipment that is approved for marine installation, refer to the specific certifying agency.
Install the DeltaV system in an enclosure suitable for your environment with EMC-
reduction shielding (15 dB minimum).
Include an EMC power line filter such as a Tyco S Series or equivalent on all DC input
leads at the DeltaV system's enclosure with the filter grounded at the enclosure.
11
Installing Your DeltaV System
Note
All electrical installations must conform to applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations.
All installation and maintenance procedures described in this document must be performed by
qualified personnel and all equipment must be used only for the purposes described. If the
equipment is used in a manner not specified, the protection provided by the equipment may be
impaired.
Related information
CE Statement
Note
This manual describes installation and maintenance procedures for products that have been tested
to be in compliance with appropriate CE directives. To maintain compliance, these products must be
installed and maintained according to the procedures described in this document. Failure to follow
the procedures may compromise compliance.
Installation Planning
The appendices in this manual contain reference information to help you plan system
installation.
12
Installing Your DeltaV System
Standard electrical tools (voltmeter, wire cutter, wire stripper, pliers, screwdriver)
Standard installation tools (screwdrivers, drill with standard bits)
Ethernet cable tools (crimper, cable tester)
Please see the workstation instructions for information on the tools needed to install the
workstation and its peripherals.
Site Preparation
Properly designed and installed power distribution, ground networks, and signal wiring are
part of site preparation and are extremely important for optimum DeltaV system
operation. Even the best control system can only perform as well as the electrical
foundation on which it is built. Clean input power, single-point grounding, and adequate
shielding from outside electrical interference are a must.
Power distribution, ground networks, and signal wiring should be installed before the
system is installed. Use the manual, Site Preparation and Design for DeltaV Digital
Automation Systems, as your resource for proper site preparation. This manual is included
on the DeltaV Documentation Library disk, on the DeltaV WebCD, and on the Foundation
Support website. It can also be ordered separately as a printed manual.
This manual, Installing Your DeltaV Digital Automation System, provides details for installing
specific DeltaV products including specific designation of wiring terminals. It also shows
some power, ground, and signal wiring, but these are shown for reference only. Always
refer to the site preparation manual for details on power, ground, and signal wiring, not
the installation manual. Always refer to the installation manual for information on
installing DeltaV hardware.
13
Installing Your DeltaV System
Note
Some images in this manual show bullet style wiring connections. This style is used for reference only
and splicing wires into wires to emulate bullet connections is never recommended by Emerson
Process Management. Always use terminal-to-terminal wiring as shown in the Site Preparation and
Design for DeltaV Digital Automation Systems manual.
Wiring Guidelines
The power and grounding terminals and field termination points on the I/O subsystem and
the system power supplies are designed to accept 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG) stranded or solid
wire. To select wire, calculate the maximum current limit expected for each wire. Local
electrical codes define the wire size required for a specific current.
Shielded twisted pair wiring is recommended for low-level signal wiring to reduce
susceptibility to noise. You can order an I/O carrier with a shield bar (to terminate the
shields from field wiring) or without a shield bar (where termination is not necessary).
Power Guidelines
The removable connectors on the System Power Supplies and legacy Bulk Power Supplies
are not designed to interrupt current flow in circuits under load and can be damaged if
used for this purpose. If you need to disconnect power, use a separate component such as
a knife blade fuse terminal block or breaker that is designed for this purpose. Multiple
manufacturers make knife blade fuse terminal blocks that provide a disconnect function
and fusing for the supply. If you use a fuse or breaker in the disconnect circuit, size it
appropriately for the load.
Torque Limits
When you install the DIN rails and DeltaV equipment, do not exceed the maximum torque
limits for the mounting screws.
14
Installing Your DeltaV System
The following steps for installation are listed in the most common order. You can elect to
perform these steps in another order that is more convenient for your project.
CAUTION!
The DeltaV I/O Cards and Controller must be mounted vertically on the horizontal carrier for
cooling purposes.
a. Check the key settings on the I/O terminal blocks and install them on the I/O
interface carrier.
b. Connect field wiring.
c. Install the I/O cards on the I/O interface carrier.
3. Install the DeltaV Controller.
a. Install the bulk power supply and connect the supply inputs.
b. Power up the system.
15
Installing Your DeltaV System
Related information
CAUTION!
The DeltaV I/O Cards and Controller must be installed vertically on the horizontal carrier for
cooling purposes.
16
Installing Your DeltaV System
Related information
An area 1.3 cm (0.5 in.) wide, centered 4.5 cm (1.75 in.) from the left side of a 2-
wide power/controller carrier.
An area 1.3 cm (0.5 in.) wide, centered 8.3 cm (3.25 in.) from either side of an 8-
wide I/O interface carrier.
If more than one carrier is needed, connect carriers end-to-end on one rail or stack them
on separate rails by using a DeltaV LocalBus Cable. Refer to Appendix B for carrier
specifications.
17
Installing Your DeltaV System
Related information
Carrier Specifications
Note
The middle two screws are for G-rail mounting and the upper and lower screws are for T-rail
mounting.
18
Installing Your DeltaV System
Note
2-wide carriers should be installed to the left of any 8-wide carriers.
19
Installing Your DeltaV System
Note
The figures in this manual depict a DeltaV system that occupies a single enclosure and show
the carrier shield bar connected to an isolated common ground reference. If multiple
enclosures are used, connect the carrier shield bar to the enclosure frame. Refer to the Site
Preparation Guide for DeltaV Automation Systems for detailed information on system
grounding.
CAUTION!
The screw connection labeled DC Reference Ground in Figure 2-5 is to be used for
reference ground only. Do not use the other three connections.
Figure 2-5shows the carrier ground wiring diagram for the System Power Supplies.
20
Installing Your DeltaV System
Dedicated Plant
Ground Grid Point
DC Reference Ground
2-Wide
Power/
Controller 8-Wide I/O Interface Carrier
Carrier
Each pair of slots on the Legacy Vertical and horizontal I/O carriers have four screw
terminals for bussed field power. Two of the terminals are for the supply connection and
two of the terminals are for the supply return connection.
Each bussed field power connection routes power to two adjacent I/O cards. You can use a
different bulk power supply for each bussed field power connection or you can extend
power to another pair of I/O cards.
The bussed field power connection provides power to two adjacent I/O cards to power
field devices. Cards 1 and 2 are paired together and must use the same field voltage level.
Similarly, cards 3 and 4 must use the same field voltage level, although this level can be
different from cards 1 and 2.
21
Installing Your DeltaV System
VerticalPLUS Carriers
Each slot on the VerticalPLUS carrier has four screw terminals for bussed field power. Two
of the terminals are for the + field power connection and two of the terminals are for the -
field power connection. Refer to "Extending Bussed Field Power to VerticalPLUS Carriers"
for the bussed field power terminal assignments.
Each bussed field power connection routes power to one slot. You can use a different
power source for each bussed field power connection or you can extend power to another
slot. Jumpers are pre installed at the factory to extend field power to slots 1-4. With these
jumpers installed, the I/O cards installed in slots 1-4 must use the same field voltage level.
Similarly, slots 5-8 have jumpers pre installed at the factory to extend field power to slots
5-8 and the I/O cards installed in slots 5-8 must use the same field voltage level. It is
recommended that you use a separate power feed to each field power connector. A field
power connector is the connector that connects to a bank of four I/O cards.
CAUTION!
Ensure that the bussed field power connection to each carrier slot is correct for the card being
installed in the slot. Card damage can result if there is a mismatch between the field power
voltage at the carrier slot and the card installed in the slot.
Related information
For all carrier types, supply the same voltage at bussed field power to all cards on a carrier
whenever possible. Supply clean bussed field power to the I/O carriers and use inductive
noise reduction techniques on I/O signals. Refer to Appendix K for bussed field power
guidelines.
WARNING!
If more than one bussed power source is used, place a label near the bussed field power
connectors containing the following English and French statements: WARNING: MORE THAN
ONE LIVE CIRCUIT. SEE INSTALLATION DIAGRAM. AVERTISSEMENT: CT EQUIPMENT
RENFERME PLUSIEURS CICUITS SOUS TENSION. VOIR LE SCHMA DINSTALLATION.
22
Installing Your DeltaV System
This section explains how to extend bussed field power to the horizontal and Legacy
Vertical carriers. For VerticalPLUS carriers, refer to the Extending Bussed Field Power to
VerticalPLUS Carriers topic.
Bussed field power can be extended to horizontal carriers and Legacy Vertical carriers if the
addition of the next two I/O cards does not exceed the 6.5 A rating of the connection to
the source. Figure 2-6 shows the screw terminal assignments on the bussed field power
connector on horizontal and Legacy Vertical carriers.
WARNING!
For Legacy Vertical and horizontal carriers, field power for one I/O card can be extended to
additional pairs of I/O cards only if they have the same field voltage requirements.
WARNING!
If extending bussed field power to Legacy Vertical and horizontal carriers, removing the
connector will remove power from all extended connectors.
Figure 2-6: Bussed Field Power Connector on Horizontal and Legacy Vertical Carriers
Keys supplied with the two-part connector on the horizontal and Legacy Vertical carriers
prevent damage to the cards if an incorrect power source is connected after the cards are
installed. Install the keys in each field power connector based on the power source you
23
Installing Your DeltaV System
connect to that connector. Because bussed field power can be supplied separately to each
half of a connector, make sure you install keys in each side. As an example, Figure 2-7
shows bussed field power keying connections for horizontal and Legacy Vertical Carriers
for 120 VAC only.
Figure 2-7: Bussed Field Power Keying Connections for 120 VAC Only
You can set up any standard that meets your needs for the keying scheme. Figure 2-8
shows an example keying scheme.
24
Installing Your DeltaV System
Figure 2-8: Bussed Field Power Keying Scheme Example for Horizontal and Legacy
Vertical Carriers
Note
This connector can be used for both DC and AC power.
The following information pertains to horizontal and Legacy Vertical Carriers. For
VerticalPLUS carriers refer to Appendix M.
If the bussed field power supplies one pair of I/O cards only and is not extended to
additional I/O cards, connect wiring to the assigned screw terminal connection on
the top of the I/O interface carrier as shown in Figure 2-9.
Note
You might prefer to remove the screw terminal connector to install wiring and replace it on
the I/O interface carrier after wiring is installed.
25
Installing Your DeltaV System
If the bussed field power is extended to additional I/O cards, connect wiring to the
assigned screw terminal connection on the top of the I/O interface carrier as shown
in Figure 2-10.
WARNING!
When power is extended, removing the connector will break the connection between the
power supply and downstream devices.
Related information
When carriers are installed on separate DIN rails, extender cables are used to extend
LocalBus power. Extender cables connect to one-wide carriers on the left and right sides of
the 2-wide and 8-wide carriers.
Note
The 8-wide carriers must be left-aligned when using extender cables.
A standard installation uses one extender cable; however, dual extender cables can also be
used. The following procedure is for a standard installation that uses one carrier extender
cable.
26
Installing Your DeltaV System
1. Install the right and left-side one-wide extender cable carriers by sliding together the
48 pin connectors on the sides of the carriers.
2. Connect the 44-pin D-shell (male) connector on the extender cable to the top D-
shell connector labeled A on the right-side carrier and fasten the retainer screws.
3. Connect the 44-pin D-shell connector on the other end of the cable to the top D-
shell connector labeled A on the left-side carrier and fasten the retainer screws.
Related information
Related information
27
Installing Your DeltaV System
3. Connect field wiring for the I/O terminal block as shown in Figure 2-12 or in the I/O
card wiring diagrams in Appendix C Interface Specifications.
Note
Field wiring connections are specific to the I/O card type associated with the I/O terminal
block.
28
Installing Your DeltaV System
Note
The channel assignments in the preceding image pertain to the I/O terminal block, the fused
I/O terminal block, and the 4-wire terminal block. For all other terminal block applications,
refer to Appendix C Interface Specifications.
Related information
WARNING!
Before installing a card in a carrier slot, ensure that the bussed field power voltage at the slot
matches the field power requirements for the card. Card damage can result during installation
if there is a mismatch between the field power voltage at a carrier slot and the card installed in
the slot.
WARNING!
I/O cards are designed to be installed on terminal blocks. If you temporarily install a card
on the carrier without a terminal block, be sure to carefully align the pins on the card
with the connector on the carrier to prevent damage to the pins.
29
Installing Your DeltaV System
2. Align the connectors on the I/O card with the connectors on the I/O carrier and the
I/O terminal block and push to attach
3. Tighten the mounting screw.
1. Check the key settings on the corresponding Series 2 cards and set the keys on the
terminal block to match. Refer to I/O Interface Keying for information on key
settings.
2. Locate the assigned slot location on the I/O interface carrier. Remember that the
lower slot number must be odd and the upper slot number must be the next higher
even number. Place the tabs on the back of the I/O terminal block through the slots
on the carrier and push the I/O terminal block up to lock it into place.
3. Connect the field wiring for the redundant I/O terminal blocks as shown in the Series
2 card wiring diagrams and redundant terminal block figures in Appendix C Interface
Specifications.
Related information
30
Installing Your DeltaV System
Related information
Note
You can use an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) to back up the controller power during short-
term power outages. The UPS allows the controller to continue operating and to maintain current
process data even when AC main power is down. Refer to Appendix D Controller Specifications for
installation information. Refer to the UPS manufacturers specifications for all other UPS information.
1. Align the connectors on the back of the controller with the connectors on the right
slot of the 2-wide power/controller carrier and push to attach.
2. Tighten the mounting screw.
31
Installing Your DeltaV System
Related information
Controller Specifications
Controller Redundancy
This section describes the connections for a simplex system power supply. Refer to
Appendix E System Power Supply Specifications for system power supply specifications
and for details on redundancy.
1. Connect the input supply wires to the input power connection on the top of the
system power supply. Figure 2-15 shows input supply wiring for the system power
supply (AC/DC). Figure 2-15 shows the input supply wiring for the system power
supply (Dual DC/DC). If you have secondary system power supplies, connect the
input supply drops to each system power supply as shown in Appendix E System
Power Supply Specifications.
32
Installing Your DeltaV System
WARNING!
Always remove input power to the supply before connecting or disconnecting the input
power connection. The connector should not interrupt current flow and could be
damaged if actuated under a load condition. Refer to Appendix J Power Guidelines for
more information.
Figure 2-15: Simplex Wiring Diagram for System Power Supply (AC/DC)
Refer to Appendix J Power Guidelines for power supply and grounding overviews.
33
Installing Your DeltaV System
Figure 2-16: Simplex Wiring Diagram for System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC)
34
Installing Your DeltaV System
+
DI 24 VDC
isolated card
24 VDC external +
power supply
Note
The alarm relay contact is closed during normal operation. The alarm relay is shown open
(unpowered condition) in the following figure.
3. Align the system power supply with the connector on the 2-wide power/controller
carrier and push to attach, as shown in the following figure. Tighten the mounting
screw.
35
Installing Your DeltaV System
Related information
After hardware installation, refer to the DeltaV Release Notes KBA for information on
installing DeltaV software on the workstation.
1. Follow the instructions supplied with your workstation to connect the monitor,
keyboard, and mouse to the central processing unit (CPU). Refer to the
documentation supplied with your workstation for details on the I/O ports
2. If the DeltaV label is not installed on your workstation monitor, apply it to the lower
right corner of the monitor faceplate.
3. Install the system identifier on the parallel printer port or Universal Serial Bus (USB).
36
Installing Your DeltaV System
4. Refer to the documentation supplied with your printer for hardware installation
information.
The UPS must be mounted upright on a level surface, such as a floor or a work surface, for
proper operation. The UPS is not rack-mountable or DIN rail-mountable. We recommend
that you use a separate UPS for each device to provide maximum backup time.
If you use the UPS to provide backup for your workstation, follow the instructions included
with the UPS to connect it to the Central Processing Unit (CPU) and to the monitor. Refer
to Appendix D for UPS specifications.
If you use the UPS to provide backup for your controller, refer to Appendix D Controller
Specifications for installation information.
Note
Refer to the UPS manual for hold time and LED/Alarm indications.
Related information
37
Installing Your DeltaV System
connect the DeltaV system to a plant-wide LAN. To minimize the traffic on the plant-wide
LAN, configure a router to filter the IP addresses. Refer to the DeltaV Books Online for
more information on configuring a router.
This section provides basic hub installation examples and includes cable-specific
information and requirements for installing the Control Network. Appendix G provides
details on cable shield orientations and contains diagrams that show switches connected
in cascade and star topologies, fiber-optic and twisted pair cable connections, and switch
configuration.
To set up the Control Network, install the hub and connect network communication cables
between nodes (controllers and workstations). The hubs can stand alone or can be linked
(cascaded) to other hubs. Each hub is equivalent to a single IEEE 802.3 repeater (1 hop).
The number of hops that are allowed and the maximum distance between each hop varies
with the type of hub and whether the link is 10Mbit or 100Mbit. 10Mbit links allow four
hops and 100Mbit links allow two hops.
If your DeltaV system consists of one workstation and one controller only, you can connect
the DeltaV network without using a hub. The cable must be routed directly from the
workstation to the controller. Figure 2-21 shows an example of a no hub system.
Note
No-hub cable, also called crossover cable, is for systems with no Control Network Hub. Its wiring is
different from that of the straight-through Ethernet cables used with DeltaV Control Network Hubs.
Related information
All Cat5-Twisted Pair (TP) and fiber-optic cables should be made, installed, and
tested by an experienced LAN installer.
A DeltaV system can have a maximum of four repeater hops on the Control Network
(a maximum of four hubs can be linked together in series). 10Mbit networks allow
four repeater hops and 100Mbit networks allow two repeater hops.
For Cat5 TP cables be sure that:
38
Installing Your DeltaV System
- All cables are made from screened Category 5 cable with a maximum length of
100 m (328 ft) and an insulated conductor diameter of 0.89 to 0.99 mm (0.035
to 0.040 in).
- Straight-through cables are terminated with RJ45 connectors to EIA/TIA 568B
pin-outs at both ends.
- Crossover cables are terminated with RJ45 connectors to 568B pinouts on one
end and 568A pinouts on the opposite end.
- Cables used to cascade hubs and switches have an unshielded connector on one
end and a shielded connector on the opposite end. Refer to Building Twisted
Pair Cable Assemblies.
- Unshielded RJ45 connectors are used at all workstation connections.
- Shielded RJ45 connectors are used at all controller connections and all hub and
switch connections to nodes.
- All cables are tested with the Microtest PentaScannerTM testing tool.
- Ethernet wall outlets, punchdown blocks, and patch panels are not supported.
Fiber-Optic Cables
For fiber-optic cables, use the cable and connector type specified by the equipment
manufacturer for the fiber-optic ports on their equipment. The type of fiber-optic cable
required could be multimode or single-mode and depends on the equipment's port
specifications, the site's physical layout, and the distance between fiber-optic ports from
device to device. The equipment manufacturer also specifies a fiber-optic loss budget. The
acceptable loss per kilometer for the fiber-optic cable can be determined from the loss
budget so that the overall cable loss does not exceed the equipments loss budget. The
loss budget must include all fiber-optic splices and fiber-optic connector losses from end
to end. The following list provides some guidelines for using fiber-optic cable:
39
Installing Your DeltaV System
Fiber-optic cables are terminated with ST, SC, MTRJ, or LC connectors depending
upon the physical port that is used on the fiber-optic device. Refer to the
manufacturer's specifications for the fiber-optic port type used on their equipment.
All fiber-optic links should be tested for attenuation (light loss) with an optical power
meter. The entire link, including all assembled cables, connectors and splices from
end to end should be measured. This measurement should not exceed the
equipment manufacturer's loss budget specification and at least a 3dB margin
should be left.
CAUTION!
Substandard cables can create serious communication problems. Make sure all cables meet the
specifications listed in Appendix G Control Network Specifications.
Related information
You must connect the test equipment to both ends of the cable to test it properly.
The testing tool checks each cable based on its type and issues a Pass or Fail reading.
Make sure the cable passes each test. The tests supported by the Microtest
PentaScanner testing tool include the following:
Cable mapping
Length
Crosstalk
Attenuation
Attenuation-to-crosstalk ratio
Impedance
Loop resistance
Capacitance
CAUTION!
Substandard cables can create serious communication problems. Make sure all cables
meet the specifications listed in Appendix G Control Network Specifications.
2. If you have a simplex Control Network, connect the unshielded end of a network
cable to the twisted pair port on the primary Network Interface Card (NIC) and
connect the shielded end of the cable to the primary hub as shown in the following
figure.
40
Installing Your DeltaV System
Shielded
connector
Unshielded
connector
Note
For hub-to-hub connections, one end of the cable must have unshielded connectors.
For redundant Control Networks, be sure to verify the NIC binding order to
differentiate between the primary and secondary NICs.
3. If you have a redundant Control Network, connect the unshielded end of a network
cable to the twisted pair port on the workstations primary NIC and connect the
shielded end of the cable to the primary hub as shown in Figure 2-23. Connect
another cable from the twisted pair port on the workstations secondary NIC to the
secondary hub. It is helpful to identify the Control Network cables with color-coded
boots. Emerson Process Management recommends the following conventions: a
yellow color-coded boot for the primary Control Network cable and a black color-
coded boot for the secondary Control Network cable.
Note
Make sure you are consistent in your primary and secondary network connections so they are
not crosswired.
41
Installing Your DeltaV System
Primary hub
Shielded
connector
Primary NIC
unshielded
Secondary hub connector
Secondary NIC
unshielded connector
Shielded connector
Note
For hub-to-hub connections, one end of the cable must have unshielded connectors
4. Connect network cables from the hub(s) to the RJ45 connectors on the bottom of
each controller. The front connector is for the primary Control Network and the rear
connector is for the secondary Control Network. Refer to the following figure to
locate the connectors.
Shielded connectors
Secondary Primary
42
Installing Your DeltaV System
To improve the security of the DeltaV system, Emerson recommends that you do not
connect the DeltaV Professional, Operator, and Base workstations to a plant LAN or
gateway. Because the engineering database is on the ProfessionalPLUS station and should
be protected from possible unauthorized external access, Emerson also recommends that
you do not connect the ProfessionalPLUS station to the plant LAN.
The following section describes the connections for a simplex bulk power supply. Refer to
Appendix H for bulk power supply specifications and dimensions.
43
Installing Your DeltaV System
1. Install the bulk power supply. Refer to "Panel-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk
AC to 12 VDC" for dimensions and the drill hole spacing for the mounting plate. The
AC connector terminals use # 6 screws. The bus bar has a 6.7 mm (0.265 in.) hole for
a 6.4 mm (0.25 in.) stud.
CAUTION!
To prevent accidental shorting, cover the positive bus bar with a 2.5 cm (1 in.) piece of
1.9 cm (0.75 in.) heat-shrink tubing.
2. Connect the bulk power supply to input power distribution as shown in the following
figure. If you have secondary bulk power supplies, connect each one to the input
power distribution as shown in Appendix J System Power Guidelines.
3. Install common system supply and ground wiring.
Figure 2-26: Simplex Power and Ground Wiring Diagram for Bulk AC to 12 or
24 VDC Power Supply
Optional Isolation Transformer
L
G N L
Bulk AC Power
Distribution/UPS
Bulk AC to 12 VDC
or Bulk AC to 24 VDC
Power Supply
G N L
AC Connector
Dedicated
Plant Ground
Grid Point
Isolated
Common
Ground
Reference
44
Installing Your DeltaV System
Figure 2-27: Simplex Power and Ground Wiring Diagram for Bulk 24 VDC to 12
VDC Power Supply
DC Power
Distribution
Hard Wired to
(+) (-)
Isolated
Common
Ground 24 VDC DC Return Ground
Reference
(+)
(+)
(-)
12 VDC (+)
Related information
Users must assign their own PC names and IP addresses to the remote workstations before
installing DeltaV software. If the remote workstation is already on the plant-wide LAN, it
has been assigned a name and IP address that can be used for communications with the
DeltaV system. If you are building a dedicated DeltaV Remote Network, then workstation
node names and IP addresses must be assigned before the workstations are set up in the
45
Installing Your DeltaV System
DeltaV Explorer. These assigned node names must be used as the workstation names in
the DeltaV Explorer. Refer to the online help for the DeltaV Workstation Configuration
application for information.
The cable installation requirements for the DeltaV Remote Network are the same as the
installation requirements for the DeltaV Control Network. Refer to Control Network
Installation Requirements for cable requirements and to Appendix G Control Network
Specifications for detailed installation information.
Related information
After establishing a serial connection between the setup computer and the GPS network
time server, configure the network and timing parameters. Use the IP addresses and
subnet mask described in the following sections and set up the time server for broadcast
mode.
IP Addresses
The DeltaV system supports both a primary and an optional backup Network Time Server
on the control network. The Network Time Servers can be attached to either the primary
or the secondary control network. It is recommended that the primary Network Time
Server be attached to the primary control network and the backup Network Time Server
be attached to the secondary control network in a redundant control network system. If
the system is simplex (has only a primary control network) attach both Network Time
Servers to the primary control network.
For the primary Network Time Server use the following IP addresses:
For the backup Network Time Server use the following IP addresses:
The DeltaV system also supports both a primary and backup Network Time Server on the
DeltaV Remote Network. If you are attaching a Network Time Server to a DeltaV Remote
Network, the IP address is not predefined in the DeltaV system. Your network
46
Installing Your DeltaV System
administrator must assign the Network Time Server a valid IP address for the remote
network segment and this address must be used in the Remote Network properties dialog
box in the DeltaV Explorer.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask for the Network Time Servers attached to the control network is:
255.254.0.0
The subnet mask for the Network Time Servers attached to the remote network(s) must be
assigned by your network administrator.
The route (default gateway for the devices on a different subnet) is not required.
Broadcast Mode
To work with the DeltaV system, the Network Time Server must be setup for broadcast
mode and the broadcast interval must be set to 16 seconds. Establish a telnet or serial
connection between the setup computer and the Network Time Server and enter the
following sequence of commands at the command shell. (Type the question mark (?) at
any command prompt for a list of command options.)
1. root
2. net
3. ntp
4. broad 8 (this sets the broadcast timer for 16 seconds)
5. bcast
6. show
7. The show command should display the address 255.255.255.255. If it does display
this address, go to the next step. If it does not, enter Add 255.255.255.255.
8. exit
WARNING!
The Stratus ftServer 4500 fault-tolerant server hardware requires special expertise and
product knowledge. Trained and experienced Stratus personnel should be consulted before
the server is installed and set up. Contact the Emerson Process Management Global Service
Center for assistance before installing your Stratus server.
The Stratus ftServer 4500 can be used as a hardware platform for DeltaV Application
stations. Refer to the current DeltaV Fault-Tolerant server Product Data Sheet for the latest
information on the DeltaV applications supported on this server. The server is either a
pedestal system that is placed on the floor or a rack-mounted system that is installed in a
customer-supplied rack.
47
Installing Your DeltaV System
Emerson Process Management has arranged for a Stratus representative to assist you to
unpack and install the system. Contact the Emerson Global Service Center to obtain the
current Stratus contact information to arrange for this pre-paid service. It is highly
recommended that you use this service; however, if time constraints prevent you from
doing so, you can attempt to set up the system without this service. As soon as possible,
arrange for the Stratus install service to inspect the server and to provide training on
correctly using and maintaining the server.
To install without the Stratus service, unpack the system, following the directions that
accompany the shipping container, and carefully inspect the hardware for damage. If the
hardware is undamaged, find the installation manual in the shipping container and use it
to install the system. If the hardware is damaged, contact the Emerson Global Service
Center. For information on configuring the ftServer software to run the DeltaV system,
refer to Books Online. For complete technical information on the fault-tolerant servers,
visit the Stratus website and refer to the Stratus hardware and software manuals and to the
electronic documentation installed on the servers.
48
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
This chapter provides guidelines to help ensure that your system is installed properly and
to help you troubleshoot hardware problems. The System Administration and
Maintenance manual in Books Online and the Release Notes KBA provide updated
maintenance and troubleshooting information.
After installing, it is recommended that you check out the hardware to ensure a smooth
startup.
After checkout, start up the DeltaV software following the instructions in the manual
Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System. You can then verify and
troubleshoot your hardware installation by using:
DeltaV Explorer to view the overall structure and layout of your system
Diagnostics utilities to check workstation hardware
DeltaV Diagnostics to view diagnostics data for DeltaV hardware
49
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
Related information
The voltage at the System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) is 12.1-12.3 volts.
The voltage at the last carrier is greater than 11 volts.
Bussed field power is 24 VDC or 115/230 VAC as applicable.
For 12 VDC systems with redundant System Power Supplies, remove one power supply
before verifying the voltage.
The voltage at the System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) is 24.2-24.6 volts.
The voltage at the last carrier is greater than 11 volts.
Bussed field power is 24 VDC or 115/230 VAC as applicable.
For 24 VDC systems with redundant System Power Supplies, remove one power supply
before verifying the voltage.
Check output loading and verify that the voltages (where present) are in the proper range
at all associated screw terminal connections. Also, verify that the expected load is within
the capacity of the unit by checking the calculations in the installation worksheets.
Related information
Installation Worksheets
50
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
Controller LEDs
The following table describes the LEDs for the MD, MD Plus, MX, and MQ controllers.
51
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
52
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
53
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
LED Status
Link Act On - Link
Blinking - Activity
Off - No link. Check the cable connection.
54
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
LED Status
100 10 On - 100 MHz
Off - 10 MHz
LED Status
Link Act On - Link
Blinking - Activity
Off - No link.
LED Status
STATUS - Device Flashing green - device is initializing
status Solid green - Device is operational
LED Status
LS/DA 1, 2, V.24 - Solid green - valid link
Link status Blinking green - port is disabled
Running light - initialization phase after a reset
Off - no link. Check the cable connection.
55
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
56
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
57
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
Related information
Interface Specifications
58
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
59
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
Table 3-12:
60
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
61
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
62
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
Related information
Interface Specifications
63
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
64
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
65
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
66
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
67
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
68
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
69
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
Related information
Interface Specifications
70
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
71
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
Power: should always be On (green). If the power LED is off, provide power to the
card.
Error: Whenever the Fault LED is on (red), the VIM 2 is in error; all other LED states
are not significant.
Active: When lit (green) indicates that the card is commissioned and operating as
the active card in a redundant pair.
Standby: When lit (green) indicates that the card is commissioned and operating as
the standby card in a redundant pair. The Standby LED is always off in simplex mode.
Network: When lit (amber) indicates valid VIMNet network communications.
Ctlr Comm: When lit (amber) indicates valid LocalBus communications.
The following table shows the LED pattern when the VIM 2 is decommissioned.
72
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
The following table shows the LED pattern when the VIM 2 is commissioned and
communicating with both the DeltaV controller and with external devices. Note that if the
Active LED is on and the Standby LED is off, the redundancy role is Active. If the Active LED
is off and the Standby LED is on the redundancy role is Standby.
LED State
Active On
Standby Off
Network On
Ctlr Comm On
Power On
The following table shows the LED pattern when the VIM 2 is commissioned but not
communicating on the LocalBus and there is a VIMNet network error. The redundancy role
is Active. If the Standby LED is On and the Active is Off with all other LED states the same,
the redundancy role is Standby.
Table 3-27: VIM 2 is commissioned but not communicating on the LocalBus; VIMNet
network error
The following table shows the LED pattern when the VIM 2 is commissioned and
communicating on the LocalBus but there are errors on the VIMNet network. The
redundancy role is Active. If the Standby LED is On and the Active is Off with all other LED
states the same, the redundancy role is Standby.
LED State
Active On
Standby Off
Network Blink
Ctlr Comm On
73
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
LED State
Power On
74
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
Related information
Interface Specifications
75
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
76
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
Related information
Interface Specifications
77
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
Correct Operating
LED Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause
Green P (Power) On Off Internal supply voltage
is too low.
Green P1 (Power 1) On Off Supply voltage 1 is less
than 18 V.
Green P2 (Power 2) On Off Supply voltage 2 is less
than 18 V.
Green/yellow LOCK On (green continu- Off Device is in an un-
ous) - The device is locked state.
locked.
On (yellow contin-
uous) - The device
is temporarily un-
locked but will be
locked down after
the lockdown tim-
er has expired.
Flashing (green) -
Device passes into
the lockdown
state.
Red/yellow RL1 (Relay Off - Signal contact is Red On (continuous) Signal contact is open;
1) closed; not reporting reporting an error.
an error. Yellow On (continu- Signal contact is open;
ous) the Manual Setting is
active.
Red/yellow RL2 (Relay Off - Signal contact is Red On (continuous) Signal contact is open;
2) closed; not reporting reporting an error.
an error Yellow On (continu- Signal contact is open;
ous) the Manual Setting is
active.
Green RUN On (continuous) - Off Device is in reset
The device is ready mode.
for operation.
On (flashing) - The
device is booting.
Green TEST On - LED test activa- Off LED test not activated.
ted.
78
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
Correct Operating
LED Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause
Green ACA/Flash Ac-
cess - displays the ACA
flash access with the
Run LED.
Every DeltaV media module has one LED per port. The meaning of the media modules
port status LED depends upon the item selected on the MD20 or MD30 base Smart
Switches. Press the Select button to cycle through the items on the base switch. The
following table describes the display status LEDs on the DeltaV MD20 and MD30 Smart
Switches and the meaning of the port LEDs on the media modules
Table 3-34: Display Status LEDs on MD Base Smart Switches and Meaning on Media
Modules
79
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
Table 3-34: Display Status LEDs on MD Base Smart Switches and Meaning on Media
Modules (continued)
Table 3-35: Device Status LEDs on DeltaV RM100 and FP20 Smart Switches
Correct Operating
LED Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause
Green/yellow P (Pow- On (green continu- Off Supply voltage is off or
er) ous) - Supply vol- too low.
tages are on.
On (yellow contin-
uous) - Only one
supply voltage is
on.
Green RUN On (green continu- Off Device is in reset
ous) - Device is mode.
ready for opera-
tion.
Flashing (green) -
Device is booting.
Green/yellow LOCK On (green continu- Off Device is in an un-
ous) - Device is locked state.
locked.
On (yellow contin-
uous) - Device is
temporarily un-
locked but will en-
ter the locked state
after the lockdown
timer expires.
Flashing (green) -
Device passes into
the locked state.
80
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
Table 3-35: Device Status LEDs on DeltaV RM100 and FP20 Smart Switches (continued)
Correct Operating
LED Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause
Red FAULT Off - not reporting an On (red continuous) Reporting an error.
error.
The following table describes the port status LEDs on the DeltaV RM100 and FP20 Smart
Switches
Table 3-36: Port Status LEDs on DeltaV RM100 and FP20 Smart Switches
Correct Operating
LED Condition Fault Indication Possible Cause
Green/LS (Link Status) On (green continu- Off No valid link or con-
ous) - Valid link or nection.
connection.
Flashing green
once per second -
Port is in standby.
Flashing green
three times per
second. - Port is
locked by the One-
Click Lockdown ap-
plication (DeltaV
version 10.3) or the
Smart Switch Com-
mand Center (Del-
taV version 11.3 or
higher).
Yellow/DA (Data) Flashing yellow - Re- Off Not receiving data.
ceiving data.
To determine the expected voltage levels for your application, refer to the:
81
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
CAUTION!
The test probe is not retained within the access hole. It can fall out and short across field wiring
if it is not held in place.
When you check out your system, remember that the DeltaV Explorer gives you a view of
your database, but this may not necessarily match what is actually installed on the
network. For example, before connecting controllers, you can define them as controller
placeholders in the Control Network. The icons for the placeholders appear in the DeltaV
Explorer but are not bound to any device. Then, when the controllers are available and
connected, you drag and drop them from the Decommissioned Controllers section to the
controller placeholder icons in the Control Network.
Resolving system problems is often a matter of making sure the database and the network
match and making sure all the nodes on the network have information about all other
nodes. The Download commands in the DeltaV Explorer provide the nodes with all the
information they need to operate and interact with other nodes.
See the manual Getting Started with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System for information
on:
Status Indicators
After you have completed the above steps and the controllers are listed in the Control
Network, look for these indicators next to the nodes:
Indicates the downloading node (the workstation) does not have all the infor-
mation about this node.
82
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
Indicates the node is not communicating. This indicator occurs if there is a bad
connection, if the controller is not powered up, or if the controller is decom-
missioned. It also occurs for a few seconds after a controller is commissioned.
Indicates the node is communicating but has an integrity problem. Integrity
problems can occur if there is a mismatch between the I/O configuration and
the installed I/O or if the node is configured for network redundancy but does
not have the necessary connections to support it.
Indicates that the node does not have a configuration. This can occur if the
node has never been downloaded. For controllers, this can occur if there is a
power failure and cold restart was not enabled for the node.
Note
If a node shows a status indicator, check for hardware faults shown in the Troubleshooting Guide
before changing your configuration.
You can automate the comparison between the physical I/O and the configured I/O with
the Autosense I/O cards command. To use the command, click on the I/O for the node,
click the right mouse button, and then select Autosense I/O Cards. The Autosense Cards
dialog lists the card sensed in the controller and the card listed in the database for each
slot.
For example, if you add a card to the controller, the dialog displays:
Click OK to add the configuration to the database. (Clicking OK does not affect existing
cards.) Click Cancel to decommission the controller and close the dialog.
information for nodes that have good status or show the indicator. To investigate
integrity problems for a node or subsystem, select its icon, click the right mouse button,
and then click Diagnose. Information about DeltaV Diagnostics is located in online help.
83
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
Troubleshooting Guide
The following information can be used to help you detect system hardware problems with
the DeltaV Explorer and correct them.
appears for nodes that are not communicating. Typically, this indicator occurs if there
is a bad connection or the controller is not powered up. To clear this indicator, go to the
node and make sure it is connected, the wiring is correct and sound, and the node is
powered up. This indicator also occurs for a few seconds after a controller is commissioned
84
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
appears for nodes that are not communicating. Typically, this indicator occurs if there
is a bad connection or if the workstation is not powered up. To clear this indicator, go to
the node and make sure it is connected, the wiring is correct and sound, and the node is
powered up.
85
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
This indicator can appear on controllers that are physically connected to the network or on
controller placeholders. Note that you cannot install setup data for a controller
placeholder; the physical node must be connected first.
Integrity problems can occur if the controller is configured for network redundancy but
does not have the necessary connections to support it. Verify that the controller is
configured to support network redundancy. If it is, make sure the controller is connected
to the network correctly.
This indicator also occurs if workstations have Event Chronicle problems (configured for a
directory that does not exist, for example), or if workstations are not communicating with
the controller.
86
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
Getting Help
The DeltaV Books Online provides information on the DeltaV system and the Online Help
for the DeltaV applications provides procedural help on using the applications and popup
help for dialog boxes.
Online Help
All DeltaV applications have online help that provides instructions on using the application.
To access help for any application, open the application, and select the help topics
command under the Help menu on the applications menu bar. For example to start
DeltaV Diagnostics and then access the help, click Start | DeltaV | Operator | Diagnostics
and then select Diagnostics Help Topics from the Help menu. To search the help for
information on specific topics, click the left mouse button on the Index tab or the Search
tab on the Help Topics dialog box, and follow the directions. For help on dialogs, click the
question mark in the upper right hand corner of the dialog, drag it to the field for which
you want help, and click the left mouse button.
Books Online
Most DeltaV product information is in Books Online. You can print any of that information
or you can order a paper copy from Emerson Process Management. The Getting Started
with Your DeltaV Digital Automation System manual and the Fieldbus Installations in a DeltaV
Digital Automation System are also available in printed form. The Getting Started with Your
DeltaV Digital Automation System contains general information about the software and
helps you get started with configuration and the Fieldbus Installations in a DeltaV Digital
Automation System provides important information about installing a fieldbus system.
87
Checking Out and Troubleshooting Your DeltaV System
12P1990 DeltaV Scalable Process System with Zone 0 Field Circuits Installation
Instructions (Part Number - 12P1990)
12P2046 DeltaV Scalable Process System, Zone 2 Installation Instructions (Part
Number - 12P2046)
12P2524 DeltaV IS I/O Code of Practice for Installation and Maintenance in Zone 2
Hazardous Areas (Part Number - 12P2524)
12P2822 DeltaV Digital Automation System Namur NE 21 Installation Instructions
(Part Number - 12P2822)
12P3292 DeltaV Type KJ7000 Series Zone 1 I/O System Installation Instructions
12P3517 DeltaV KJ1710 Single Port Fiber Switch Installation Instructions
ATEX Instruction Sheets The DeltaV ATEX Instruction Sheets (in PDF format) can
also be found on the DeltaV web site.
Technical Service
There are several options available for technical service, including help desk support,
remote diagnosis, 24-hour emergency support, and software update service. Please
complete the SureService registration process.
If the information presented in this manual does not solve your problem, visit Emerson
Process Managements Reach Us website at www.emersonprocess.com/systems/reach/
and follow the directions for your world area.
If you are calling, be at your DeltaV system if possible. This enables the Technical Support
Representative to step you through the proper problem solving procedures.
88
Environmental Specifications
Appendix A
Environmental Specifications
All DeltaV system products meet the appropriate European standards for Electromagnetic
Compatibility and carry the CE mark. All products meet CSA requirements. Contact the
factory for details.
Table A-1: Temperature and Relative Humidity Specifications for DeltaV Devices
Operating Tempera-
Device ture Storage Temperature Relative Humidity
Workstation 10C to 35C (50F to -20C to 60C (-4F to 20% to 80%, non-con-
95F) maximum 10C 140F) densing
(18F) change per hour
3Com 3C16700A 8- 0C to 40C (32F to -30C to 60C (-22F to 0% to 90%, non-con-
Port (TP) Unmanaged 104F) 140F) densing
Hub
Allied Telesyn 0C to 40C (32F to -25C to 70C (-13F to 5% to 95%, non-con-
switches: 104F) 158F) densing
AT-FS708 8-Port
(TP) Unmanaged
AT-FS709FC 8-Port
(TP) Unmanaged
with 1 100BASE-FX
Fiber Port
89
Environmental Specifications
Table A-1: Temperature and Relative Humidity Specifications for DeltaV Devices
(continued)
Operating Tempera-
Device ture Storage Temperature Relative Humidity
Cisco switches: 0C to 45C (32F to -25C to 70C (-13F to 10% to 85% non-con-
2940 8-Port (TP) 113F) 158F) densing
Managed with 1
100BASE-FX Fiber
Port
2950 24-Port (TP)
Managed
2950C 24-Port (TP)
Managed with 2
100BASE-FX Fiber
Ports
2960 8-Port (TP)
with 1 gigabit mul-
ti-function port
2960 24-Port (TP)
with 2 RJ45 ports
2960 24-Port (TP)
with 2 gigabit mul-
ti-function ports
2960 48-Port (TP)
with 2 RJ45 ports
2960 48-Port (TP)
with 2 gigabit mul-
ti-function ports
3550FX 24-Port
(FO) Managed with
24 100BASE-FX Fi-
ber Ports and 2
GBIC gigabit slots
3750-24FS 24-Port
(FO) Managed with
24 100BASE-FX Fi-
ber Ports and 2 SFP
Gigabit slots
3750-24TS-S 24-
Port (TP) Managed
with 2 SFP Gigabit
slots
3750G-12S-S 12
Slot (SFP) Managed
DeltaV MD20 and 0C to 60C (32F to -40C to 85C (-40F to 10% to 95%, non-con-
MD30 base Smart 140F) 185F) densing
Switches and media
modules, and DeltaV
FP20 Smart Switches
(non ES versions)
90
Environmental Specifications
Table A-1: Temperature and Relative Humidity Specifications for DeltaV Devices
(continued)
Operating Tempera-
Device ture Storage Temperature Relative Humidity
DeltaV MD20 and -40C to 70C (confor- -40C to 85C (-40F to 10% to 95%, non-con-
MD30 base Smart mal coating) (-40F to 185F) densing
Switches and media 158F)
modules, and FP20
Smart Switches (ES
versions)
DeltaV RM100 base 0C to 50C (32F to -20C to 85C (-4F to 10% to 95%, non-con-
Smart Switches and 122F) 185F) densing
media modules
MD Controllers, and 0C to 60C (32F to -40C to 85C (-40F to 5% to 95%, non-con-
pre-Series 2 I/O 140F) 185F) densing
MD Plus Controllers -40C to 70C (-40F to -40C to 85C (-40F to 5% to 95%, non-con-
158F) 185F) densing
MX Controllers -40C to 60C (-40F to -40C to 85C (-40F to 5% to 95%, non-con-
140F) 185F) densing
Single Port Fiber -40C to 70C (-40F to -40C to 85C (-40F to 5% to 95%, non-con-
Switch 158F) 185F) densing
Four Port Fiber Switch
Remote Interface Unit
Pre-Series 2 Profibus, 0 to 55C (32F to -40C to 85C (-40F to 5% to 95%, non-con-
Pre-Series 2 DeviceNet 131F) 185F) densing
Series 2 I/O (except -40C to 70C (-40F to -40C to 85C (-40F to 5% to 95%, non-con-
Series 2 As-Interface) 158F) 185F) densing
Series 2 As-Interface -25C to 70C (-13F to -40C to 85C (-40F to 5% to 95%, non-con-
158F) 185F) densing
System power supplies 0 to 60C (32F to -40C to 70C (-40F to 5% to 95%, non-con-
140F) 158F) densing
System Power Supply -40 to 70C (-40F to -40C to 70C (-40F to 5% to 95%, non-con-
(Dual DC/DC) 158F) 158F) densing
Legacy DIN rail-moun- -40 to 70C (-40F to -40C to 70C (-40F to 5% to 95%, non-con-
ted bulk power supply 158F) 158F) densing
Legacy Panel-mounted 0 to 60C (32F to -40C to 85C (-40F to 5% to 95%, non-con-
bulk power supply 140F) at 300 W and al- 185F) densing
titude < 914 m (3000
ft)
DeltaV Controller Fire- 0 to 55C (32F to -40C to 80C (-40F to 10% to 95%, non-con-
wall 131F) 176F) densing
Fiber-Optic Media Con- 0 to 60C (32F to -40C to 70C (-40F to 5% to 95%
verter 140F) 158F)
Fieldbus H1 Carrier -40C to 70C (-40F to -40C to 85C (-40F to 5% to 95%, non-con-
158F) 185F) densing
91
Environmental Specifications
Table A-1: Temperature and Relative Humidity Specifications for DeltaV Devices
(continued)
Operating Tempera-
Device ture Storage Temperature Relative Humidity
Round ribbon cable 0C to 60C (0F to -20C to 70C (-4F to 5% to 95%, non-con-
140F) 158F) densing
Table A-2: Airborne Contaminants, Vibration, and Shock Specifications for DeltaV
Devices
Airborne Contami-
Device nants Vibration Shock
Workstation Refer to manufactur- Refer to manufactur- Refer to manufactur-
ers specifications ers specifications ers specifications
8-port hub Refer to manufactur- Refer to manufactur- Refer to manufactur-
ers specifications ers specifications ers specifications
All switches in the pre- Refer to manufactur- Refer to manufactur- Refer to manufactur-
ceding table. ers specifications ers specifications ers specifications
Fieldbus H1 carrier, ISA-S71.04-1985 Air- 1 mm peak-to-peak 10 g -sinehalf-sine
system power sup- borne Contaminants from 5 Hz to 16 Hz, 0.5 wave for 11 ms
plies, controllers, Sin- Class G3 g from 16 Hz to 150 Hz
gle Port Fiber Switch,
Remote Interface Unit,
pre-Series 2 I/O, and
Series 2 I/O
DeltaV Controller Fire- Refer to manufactur- Refer to manufactur- Refer to manufactur-
wall ers specifications ers specifications ers specifications
Legacy Bulk power ISA-S71.04-1985 Air- MIL-STD-810D Method MIL-STD-810D Method
supplies borne Contaminants 514.3, Category 1, Pro- 516.3, Procedure III
Class G2 cedure I
92
Carrier Specifications
Appendix B
Carrier Specifications
Topics covered in this appendix:
2-Wide Horizontal Power/Controller Carrier
2-Wide Horizontal Power Carrier
8-Wide Horizontal I/O Interface Carrier
1-Wide Horizontal Carrier Extenders and Cables
4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power/Controller Carrier
4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power Carrier
4-Wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater Carrier
8-Wide VerticalPLUS I/O Interface Carrier
1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extenders
4-Wide Legacy Vertical Power/Controller Carrier
8-Wide Legacy Vertical I/O Interface Carrier
Fieldbus H1 Carrier
Intrinsically Safe Power Supply Carrier
Intrinsically Safe 8-Wide Horizontal Carrier
Intrinsically Safe LocalBus Isolator Carrier
The DeltaV system supports horizontal carriers, vertical carriers, Intrinsically Safe carriers
and the Fieldbus H1 Carrier. There are two types of vertical carriers: Legacy and
VerticalPLUS. VerticalPLUS carriers can be used for both DeltaV basic process control
systems and DeltaV Safety Instrumented Systems (SIS). DeltaV SIS is not supported on
Legacy Vertical carriers. Refer to Appendix M for more information on vertical carriers.
Refer to the Installing Your DeltaV Safety Instrumented System Hardware manual for
instructions on installing an SIS system.
Horizontal Carriers
VerticalPLUS Carriers
93
Carrier Specifications
Item Specification
Capacity One system power supply and one controller or
two system power supplies
94
Carrier Specifications
Item Specification
Capacity One or two redundant system power supplies
Maximum current 13 A total output
95
Carrier Specifications
Side
View Front View 7.0 cm
2
(2.8 in.)
+ 12 VDC output
-
9.1 cm +
(3.6 in.) -
DC reference
ground for 24 VDC power
only
16.5 cm
(6.5 in.)
1
12 VDC
Output
Connector
Connect the DC reference ground when using a legacy 24 VDC bulk power supply only.
The DC reference ground connection is not required for a legacy 12 VDC bulk power
supply.
96
Carrier Specifications
Related information
Standard cable (KJ4002X1-BF2), including the left and right carrier extenders, is 1.20
meters (3.9 feet). This cable is typically used for a double door cabinet installation.
Refer to "Cabling Examples" for an installation that uses standard cable.
Short cable (KJ4002X1-BF3), including the left and right carrier extenders, is .87
meters (2.8 feet). This cable is typically used for a single door cabinet installation.
The maximum carrier limit is six for this configuration. Figure B-6 on page B-8 shows
an installation that uses short cable.
97
Carrier Specifications
Extended cable (KJ4002X1-BF4), including the left and right carrier extenders, is
1.53 meters (5 feet). This cable is typically used for custom installations. Be sure that
this configuration does not exceed the maximum LocalBus length of 6.5 meters
(21.3 feet). Refer to "Cabling Examples" for a custom installation that uses extended
cable.
Note
If two D-shell cables are used, they must be routed together from the same source to the same
destination.
LOCK
D-Shell LOCK
connector
(for dual D-Shell
cables only) 48 48 connector
Pin Pin (for dual
B connector connector B cables only)
Black
BNC
connector
+ + (for SIS only)
Jumper D
4.2 cm 3.1 cm
(1.7 in.) (1.2 in.)
4.6 cm
(1.8 in.)
Related information
Cabling Examples
98
Carrier Specifications
WARNING!
Removing the jumper removes all 12 VDC power to all cards on all downstream carriers.
When 12 VDC power is removed, cards are unable to hold the last value.
Figure B-5: Adding External Power at the Left Horizontal Carrier Extender
Cabling Examples
Figure B-6 shows a single door cabinet installation with short cable (.87 meters/2.8 feet). Be
sure to not exceed the six carrier limit with this type of installation.
99
Carrier Specifications
Figure B-7 shows a double door cabinet installation with standard cable (1.20 meters/3.9
feet).
100
Carrier Specifications
Figure B-8 shows a custom installation with extended length cable (1.53 meters/5 feet). Be
sure that this configuration does not exceed the maximum LocalBus length of 6.5 meters
(21.3 feet).
101
Carrier Specifications
Item Specification
Capacity Two system power supplies and two controllers
102
Carrier Specifications
Item Specifications
Capacity Two redundant system power supplies
Maximum current 13 A (per output connector)
103
Carrier Specifications
Item Specification
Capacity Two (primary and secondary) SISNet Repeaters
104
Carrier Specifications
105
Carrier Specifications
106
Carrier Specifications
Item Specification
Capacity Two system power supplies and two controllers
or three system power supplies and one control-
ler
107
Carrier Specifications
The dimensions for the bottom Legacy Vertical 4-wide power/controller carrier are the
same as those for the top Legacy Vertical 4-wide power/controller carrier (shown above).
The carrier connector on the bottom Legacy Vertical 4-wide power/controller carrier is
located on the top of the carrier.
108
Carrier Specifications
Item Specification
LocalBus cable Bottom cable extender: 1.0 m (3.3 ft) nominal
length
Top cable extender: 2.0 m (6.6 ft) nominal
length
2.7 cm 2.7 cm
(1.05 in.) (1.05 in.)
Bussed Field
Power Connector
55.9 cm 55.9 cm
(22.0 in.) (22.0 in.)
3.8 cm 2 3.8 cm
(1.5 in.) (1.5 in.)
109
Carrier Specifications
Fieldbus H1 Carrier
The fieldbus H1 carrier provides an H1 interface to an 8-channel discrete input card, an 8-
channel discrete output card, and terminal blocks. To function correctly, the two cards
must use the same voltage. The H1 carrier mounts on a DIN rail (T-rail only), wall, or panel
and can be enclosed in the H1 carrier enclosure.
Item Specification
Input power rating +24 VDC 20% @ 500 mA (maximum)
Output power rating +12 VDC 5% @ 600 mA (maximum)
Bussed field power (shared by both I/O cards) 6.5 A (maximum)
Fieldbus Port Foundation Fieldbus H1 - 31.25Kbit/second
Fieldbus Power 9 to 32 VDC, 12 mA (maximum)
110
Carrier Specifications
The following figure shows the dimensions for the H1 Carrier enclosure (optional).
111
Carrier Specifications
23.50 cm 20.0 cm
(9.25 in.) (7.87 in.)
Plate
Carrier
35.0 cm
(13.78 in.)
33.2 cm I/O
(13.07 in.) Card
Note
The H1 Carrier Enclosure must be grounded. The Enclosure Ground Kit and instructions for
grounding are included with the enclosure.
Item Specification
Capacity One I.S. Power Supply
112
Carrier Specifications
Item Specification
Capacity Eight I.S. I/O cards with terminal blocks.
LocalBus cable 0.35 m (1.15 ft) nominal length
0.85 m (2.79 ft) nominal length
1.20 m (3.94 ft) nominal length
113
Carrier Specifications
114
Carrier Specifications
115
Carrier Specifications
116
Interface Specifications
Appendix C
Interface Specifications
Topics covered in this appendix:
I/O Cards
Intrinsically Safe I/O Cards
Terminal Blocks
Redundant Terminal Blocks
Mass Termination Blocks
Mass Connection Boards
Intrinsically Safe Terminal Blocks
I/O Interface Keying
This appendix provides specifications and wiring diagrams for all of the I/O cards and
terminal blocks.
I/O Cards
The DeltaV I/O subsystem supports multiple types of I/O cards including analog and
discrete input and output cards, HART input and output cards, serial cards, Thermocouple
mV, RTD, ohms and intrinsically safe analog and discrete input and output cards. Bus cards
such as the Fieldbus H1, Profibus DP, AS-Interface, and DeviceNet are also supported. In
addition, some of the Series 2 versions of the cards are available in Redundant mode for
high-availability applications. The I/O subsystem consists of terminal blocks that snap onto
the carrier to provide screw termination for field wiring and the I/O cards which snap over
the terminal blocks and onto the carrier. The I/O cards convert field signals to the
appropriate format for control and communications.
117
Interface Specifications
To simplify installation and ensure that the I/O interface is suitable for the plant
environment, I/O terminal blocks have field wiring protection keys that correspond to keys
on the I/O cards. The keys ensure that the I/O card and the I/O terminal block match; an I/O
card plugs into an I/O terminal block only if the keys agree.
WARNING!
Be sure that your I/O cards and terminal blocks are compatible before plugging in I/O cards.
Card damage can result if an I/O card and terminal block are incompatible.
Related information
118
Interface Specifications
Series 2 redundant capable cards are configured, autosensed, upgraded, and operated just
like pre-Series 2 cards. Series 2 cards in Simplex mode can function as drop-in
replacements for pre-Series 2 cards of the same type. With the exception of the Simplex
mode Series 2 H1 card, which requires the Series 2 H1 terminal block, no wiring change is
required to replace a pre-Series 2 card. Series 2 cards report their operating mode (simplex
or redundant) to the DeltaV controller based on the type of terminal block on which they
are installed. Redundant terminal blocks provide wiring terminations for the redundant
cards. If a card is installed on a redundant terminal block, it reports itself as operating in
Redundant mode; otherwise, it reports itself as operating in Simplex mode.
Note
Series 2 cards must be used with an MD version of the controller when connected to a redundant
terminal block and operated in Redundant mode.
Note
For both horizontal and vertical carriers, the lower slot number in a redundant pair must be odd and
the upper slot number must be the next higher even number. For example, redundant pairs can be
installed in slots 1 and 2, 3 and 4, 9 and 10. Redundant pairs cannot be installed in slots 6 and 7, 24
and 25. Configuration tools such as the DeltaV Explorer enforce this requirement.
119
Interface Specifications
The double-wide redundant terminal blocks require only a single set of wires for each
redundant channel or fieldbus segment. (The exception is the Redundant Interface
terminal block which uses two sets of wires for the Series 2 Serial card. One set of wires is
used for each interface such as a computer.) The redundant terminal blocks contain screw
terminals appropriate for the card type and signals from the screw terminals are
connected to both cards in a redundant pair.
If all cards are redundant, the controller can support up to 32 redundant pairs. Refer to
DeltaV Books Online for more information on using Series 2 cards in a DeltaV system.
Installation Notes
The I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the AI, 8-Channel, 420 mA, AI, 8-Channel, 420 mA, HART and the Series
2 AI, 8-Channel, 420 mA, HART cards. Optional terminal blocks are the fused and 4-
wire I/O blocks, the 16 pin mass termination block for 2-wire applications, and the
24-pin mass termination block for 4-wire applications.
The Redundant Analog Input terminal block is recommended to provide screw
terminations for field wiring for Series 2 Redundant AI, 8-Channel, 420 mA, HART
cards for either 2-wire or 4-wire applications.
To function correctly, the AI cards require that 24 VDC be supplied through the
bussed field power connection. The 4-wire termination block is designed for use
with 4-wire field-powered transmitters. Power for these transmitters must be
provided from an appropriate external power source. See the transmitter
specifications for power source information. For example, if you are using the DeltaV
AI, 420 mA I/O card with a DeltaV 4-wire Termination Block, an external power
source must be connected to the 4-wire transmitter.
The open HART protocol layers digital information on the standard analog 4-20 mA
process signal.
Series 2 cards require the MD controller when connected to a redundant terminal
block and operated in Redundant mode.
Specifications
Table C-1: AI, 8-Channel, 420 mA, Specifications (HART and Series 2)
Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
120
Interface Specifications
Table C-1: AI, 8-Channel, 420 mA, Specifications (HART and Series 2) (continued)
Item Specification
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Nominal signal range (span) 4 to 20 mA
Full signal range 1 to 22.5 mA, with overrange checking
Valid range for LED indication 0.75 to 23 mA
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 120 mA typical, 150 mA maximum
Series 2 (for each card in Redundant mode
only(1)):
175 mA typical
250 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card 300 mA maximum at 24 VDC (10%)
Field circuit per channel 32 mA maximum
Series 2:
30 mA maximum
Accuracy over temperature range 0.1% of span
Resolution 16 bits
Repeatability 0.05% of span
Rolloff frequency -3 dB at 2.7 Hz, -20.5 dB at one-half the sam-
pling frequency
Calibration None required
Communications Support (only for version with HART pass-through request/response
HART) HART variable report
Field device status report
HART scan time 600-800 ms (typical) per enabled channel
Optional fuse (Simplex mode only) 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
121
Interface Specifications
Wiring Diagrams
Figure C-2: Wiring Diagram for 2-Wire AI, 8-Channel, 420 mA and AI, 8-Channel,
420 mA, HART
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection
+ -
Termination I/O Card
+ Current
2-Wire analog limiter
and/or HART
field transmitter A/D
T System
Converter
Low
pass
-
(Even no.)
filter
250
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
122
Interface Specifications
Figure C-3: Wiring Diagram for Series 2, 2-Wire AI, 8-Channel, 420 mA, HART in
Simplex Mode
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection
Optional fuse + -
Termination I/O Card
Common
connection
for 8 channels
(Odd no.)
+ Current
limiter
2-wire analog
A/D
and/or HART
Converter
field transmitter
T
System
Low
pass
-
(Even no.)
filter
250
I/O
Terminal block
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
123
Interface Specifications
Figure C-4: Wiring Diagram for Series 2, 2-Wire AI, 8-Channel, 420 mA, HART in
Redundant Mode
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection
+ - + -
2-Wire Primary I/O card
redundant
termination Common
Current connections
limiter for 8 channels
A/D
System
Converter
Low pass
(Odd no.) filter
+
250
2-Wire analog
and/or HART
field transmitter
T
Secondary I/O card
Current
limiter
-
(Even no.) A/D System
Relay Converter
Low pass
filter
Mode
250
Redundant
analog input
terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
124
Interface Specifications
Figure C-5: Wiring Diagram for Series 2, 4-Wire AI, 8-Channel, 420 mA, HART in
Simplex Mode
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection
+ -
4-Wire I/O Card Common
termination connection
(Odd no.) for 8 channels
4-Wire analog and/or
HART field transmitter + Low
pass
A/D System
(with user supplied power Converter
and isolated current output) filter
T 250
-
(Even no.)
4-Wire I/O terminal block
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
125
Interface Specifications
Figure C-6: Wiring Diagram for Series 2, 4-Wire AI, 8-Channel, 420 mA, HART in
Redundant Mode
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection
+ - + -
4-wire Primary I/O card
Relay redundant
termination Common
connections
for 8 channels
Mode
Low pass A/D
filter Converter System
(Odd no.)
4-Wire analog
and/or HART field + 250
transmitter (with user
supplied power and
isolated current output)
T
Secondary I/O card
-
(Even no.) Low pass A/D
filter Converter System
250
Redundant analog
input terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Related information
The 4-wire I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for
field wiring for the AI, 8-Channel, 15 VDC card. The 24-pin mass termination block
can also be used.
The AI, 15 VDC card does not provide power to the field transmitter. To function
correctly, the AI cards require that 24 VDC power be connected for field power.
126
Interface Specifications
Specifications
Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Nominal signal range (span) 1 to 5 VDC
Full signal range 0.25 to 5.64 VDC, with overrange checking
Valid range for LED indication 0.18 to 5.77 VDC
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 100 mA typical
150 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card 100 mA (used on card) at 24 VDC (10%)
Input impedance 2 M
Accuracy over temperature range 0.1% of span
Resolution 16 bits
Repeatability 0.05% of span
Rolloff frequency -3 dB at 1.3 Hz
-25 dB at one-half the sampling frequency
Calibration None required
Optional fuse 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
127
Interface Specifications
Wiring Diagram
+ -
4-Wire I/O Card Common
termination connection
4-Wire analog and/or (Odd no.) for 8 channels
HART field transmitter
(with user-supplied power
+ Low
pass A/D
Converter
System
filter
and isolated voltage output)
T
-
(Even no.)
4-Wire I/O terminal block
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Related information
Installation Notes
The 16-channel Analog Input terminal block provides screw terminations for field
wiring for the Series 2 AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART card. The 4-wire 16 Channel
Analog Input terminal block can also be used.
To function correctly, the card requires that 24 VDC be supplied through the bussed
field power connection.
Specifications
Item Specifications
Number of channels 16
128
Interface Specifications
Item Specifications
Isolation Field to system isolation is factory tested to
1500 VDC. No channel to channel isolation.
Nominal signal range (span) 4 to 20 mA
Full signal range 2 to 22 mA
2-wire transmitter power 13.5 V min. at 20 mA (current limited to 29 mA
maximum)
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal) 85 mA typical, 150 mA maximum
Field circuit power (per card) 600 mA maximum at 24 VDC (10%)
Field circuit per channel 30 mA maximum
Accuracy over temperature range 0.2% of span
Resolution 16 bits
Repeatability 0.05% of span
Filtering -3 db at 2.7 Hz
-6 db at 4.6 Hz
-20.5 db at 20 Hz
-34 db at 50 Hz
-90 db at 1200 Hz
Rolloff frequency -3 dB at 2.7 Hz, -20.5 dB at one-half the sam-
pling frequency
Calibration None required
Communications support HART pass-through request/response
HART variable report
Field device status report
HART scan time 600-800 ms (typical) per enabled channel
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
129
Interface Specifications
Wiring Diagram
Figure C-8: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 AI, 16-channel, 4-20 mA, HART
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection
+ -
Termination I/O Card
(Odd no.) Common
connection
+ Current
limiter
for 16 channels
250
AI 16-channel Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
terminal block 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
+
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
-
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
130
Interface Specifications
Figure C-9: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 AI, 16-channel, 4-20 mA, HART connected to
a 4-wire device
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection
+ -
4-wire I/O Card
Termination Common
connection
for 16 channels
A/D
(Odd no.) Converter System
+ Low
pass
filter
4-Wire analog and/or
HART field transmitter
T
250
(Even no.)-
4-wire 16-channel
Analog Input Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
terminal block 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
+
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
-
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Related information
131
Interface Specifications
Installation Notes
The I/O terminal block is recommended to provide terminations for field wiring for
the AO, 8-Channel, 420 mA, AO, 8-Channel, 420 mA, HART and the Series 2 AO,
8-Channel, 420 mA, HART cards in Simplex mode. Optional terminal blocks are the
fused I/O block and the 16-pin mass termination block.
The Redundant Analog Output terminal block is recommended to provide
terminations for field wiring for the Series 2 AO, 8-Channel, 420 mA, HART card in
Redundant mode.
The open HART protocol layers digital information on the standard analog 4-20 mA
process signal.
Series 2 cards require the MD controller when connected to a redundant terminal
block and operated in Redundant mode.
Specifications
Item Specifications
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Nominal signal range (span) 4 to 20 mA
Full signal range 1 mA to 23 mA
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 120 mA typical, 150 mA maximum
Series 2 (for each card in Redundant mode
only (2) :)
175 mA typical
250 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card 300 mA maximum at 24 VDC (10%)
Accuracy over temperature range 0.25% of span (0 - 60C)
Series 2:
0.25% (0 to 60C)
0.4% (-40 to 70C)
Resolution 12 bits for AO, 8-channel, 4-20 mA
14 bits for AO, 8-channel, 4-20 mA, HART
14 bits for Series 2 AO, 8-channel, 4-20
mA, HART
Output compliance 20 mA at 21.6 VDC supply into 700 load
Calibration Information stored on card
Communications Support (only for version with HART pass-through request/response
HART) HART variable report
Field device status report
HART scan time 600-800 ms (typical) per enabled channel
132
Interface Specifications
Table C-4: AO, 8-Channel, 420 mA Specifications (HART and Series 2) (continued)
Item Specifications
Optional fuse (Simplex mode only) 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
Wiring Diagrams
Figure C-10: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 AO, 8-Channel, 420 mA, HART in Simplex
Mode
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection
4-20 mA current source
- +
I/O Card Common Termination
connection
for 8 channels
Optional fuse
D/A
System Converter
(Odd no.)
+
4-20 mA device and/or HART
Load
-
(Even no.) I/O Terminal block
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
133
Interface Specifications
Figure C-11: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 AO, 8-Channel, 420 mA, HART in
Redundant Mode
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection
- + - +
Primary I/O card Redundant
Common termination
connections
for 8 channels
Mode Relay
System D/A
Converter
(Odd no.)
+
4-20 mA device
Load and/or HART
Secondary I/O card
-
(Even no.)
System D/A
Converter
Redundant analog
output terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Related information
AS-Interface
The DeltaV system supports the Actuator Sensor-Interface card (AS-Interface) and the
Series 2 AS-Interface card in Simplex mode.
The AS-Interface is a digital, serial, bi-directional communications protocol and bus system
that interconnects simple binary on/off devices such as actuators, sensors, and discrete
devices in the field. The AS-Interface standard is defined by CENELEC standard EN 50295.
134
Interface Specifications
The two-conductor AS-Interface cable supplies both power and data for field devices. An
AS-Interface network can include branches. The total cable length, (main line and all
branches), cannot exceed 100 meters. Refer to the following table for AS-Interface cable
distance limits and to the AS-Interface standard (EN 50295) for design and engineering
details on AS-Interface cable.
Item Specification
Recommended cable Unshielded AS-Interface yellow cable(3)
Distance limits 100 meters total length (main line and
branches) without repeater or extender
300 meters total length (main line and
branches) with two repeaters(4)
300 meters total length (main line and
branches) with one extender and one re-
peater
For more information on the AS-Interface and for information on installing AS-Interface
devices, refer to the AS-Interface web site at www.as-interface.com.
Installation Notes
The Interface terminal block provides terminations for field wiring for the AS-
Interface card and the Series 2 AS-Interface card in Simplex mode.
It is recommended that you do not connect the AS-Interface devices directly to the
AS-Interface card terminals. Use one AS-Interface cable to connect the AS-Interface
card to the power supply and use another AS-Interface cable to connect the devices
to the power supply.
If you are using extenders and repeaters, refer to the device data sheet for additional
cabling recommendations.
The AS-Interface bus requires a special AS-Interface power supply (purchased
separately) that provides electrical isolation from the data signals. A standard power
supply can be used but it must have a conditioning module added to its output.
Refer to the AS-Interface standard (EN 50295) for design and engineering details on
the AS-Interface power supply.
Appendix J provides information on extending power to an AS-Interface bus.
Item Specification
Number of ports Two
Port Type Actuator Sensor-Interface 167 kb/second
(3) Any other cable, shielded or unshielded, can be used if the installation meets all the impedance requirements specified in the AS-Interface
standard (EN 50295).
(4) Repeaters require an additional AS-Interface power supply on the far side of the repeater.
135
Interface Specifications
Item Specification
Isolation Each port is optically isolated from the system
and from each other and factory tested to 1500
VDC.
LocalBus Current 300 mA (max)
24 VDC Field circuit power, per card None
30 VDC AS-Interface field power per port 70 mA (max)
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
Wiring Diagram
AS-i 1 AS-i ( ) +
Encoder/
decoder 2 AS-i ( ) - Port
1
3, 5, 7 AS-i ( ) +
System
4, 6, 8 AS-i ( ) -
AS-i 9 AS-i ( ) +
Encoder/
decoder 10 AS-i ( ) -
Port
2
11, 13, 15 AS-i ( ) +
12, 14, 16 AS-i ( ) -
Interface terminal block
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
AS-i +
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
AS-i -
Port Port
1 2
Related information
136
Interface Specifications
DeviceNet
The DeltaV system supports the DeviceNet card and Series 2 DeviceNet card in Simplex
mode.
Installation Notes
Specifications
Item Specification
Number of Ports One
Port Type DeviceNet
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 400 mA typical, 600 mA maximum
Field circuit power (24 VDC nominal), per card 40 mA maximum at 24 VDC (10%)
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
137
Interface Specifications
Wiring Diagram
5 +24 VDC
Regulator
1 24 VDC return
3 Shield
System
8 Shield
4 CAN HI
2 CAN LO
Fieldbus H1 terminal
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 block (change key
position to D5)
-
V CL S CH V
+ S
Related information
Installation Notes
The Fused I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for
field wiring for the DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact and the Series 2 DI, 8-
Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact in Simplex mode. Optional terminal blocks are the I/O
terminal block and the 16-pin mass termination block.
The Redundant Discrete terminal block is recommended to provide screw
terminations for field wiring for the Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact card
in Redundant mode.
138
Interface Specifications
(Odd no.)
+ 2.4K
6.8K
-
(Even no.)
- Line Fault Detection in NAMUR Sensors Line fault detection is built into
NAMUR sensors. Do not use external resistors with NAMUR sensors; however,
you must enable line fault detection in your configuration when using NAMUR
sensors.
Specifications
Table C-8: DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact Specifications (includes Series 2)
Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
139
Interface Specifications
Table C-8: DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact Specifications (includes Series 2)
(continued)
Item Specification
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Detection level for On > 2.2 mA
Detection level for Off < 1 mA
Impedance 5 k
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 75 mA typical
100 mA maximum
Series 2:
90 mA typical
150 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card 100 mA at 24 VDC (10%)
Optional fuse (Simplex mode only) 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
Wiring Diagrams
Figure C-15: Wiring Diagram for DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
Optional fuse field power connection
+ -
Termination I/O Card
Common
connection
for 8 channels
System
(Odd no.)
+
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
140
Interface Specifications
Figure C-16: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact in
Simplex Mode
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection
Optional fuse
+ -
Termination I/O Card
Common
connection
for 8 channels
(Odd no.)
System
+ 5K
Logic
-
(Even no.)
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
141
Interface Specifications
Figure C-17: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact in
Redundant Mode
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection
+ - + -
Redundant Primary I/O card
termination Common
connections
for 8 channels
Mode
Relay System
5K
5K System
Logic
-
(Even no.)
Redundant
discrete
terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Related information
Installation Notes
The I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card and the Series 2 DI, 8-Channel,
24 VDC, Isolated card in Simplex mode. Optional terminal blocks are the fused I/O
terminal block and the 16-pin mass termination block.
142
Interface Specifications
If you use a mass termination block with the DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card,
refer to the termination block specifications for the input rating for each block.
Those specifications might be more restrictive than the specifications listed in the
following table.
Specifications
Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and from each other and factory tested to
1500 VDC.
Detection level for On > 10 VDC
Detection level for Off < 5 VDC
Input impedance 5 k
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 75 mA typical
100 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card None
Optional fuse 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
Wiring Diagram
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Related information
143
Interface Specifications
Installation Notes
The Fused I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the DI, 8-channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact card and the Series 2 DI, 8-channel, 120
VAC, Dry Contact card in Simplex mode. An optional terminal block is the I/O block.
Specifications
Item Specifications
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem at 250 VAC.
Detection level for On > 1.4 mA
Detection level for Off < 0.56 mA
Impedance 60 k
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 75 mA
100 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card 15 mA at 120 VAC
Optional fuse 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
144
Interface Specifications
Wiring Diagram
Figure C-19: Wiring Diagram for DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Dry Contact
Carrier
120 VAC Bussed
field power connection
Optional fuse
L N
Termination I/O Card
Common
(Odd no.) connection
+ for 8 channels
System
-
(Even no.)
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Related information
Installation Notes
The I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field wiring for
the DI, 8-channel, 120 VAC, Isolated card and the Series 2 DI, 8-channel, 120 VAC, Isolated
card in Simplex mode. An optional terminal block is the Fused I/O block.
Specifications
Item Specifications
Number of channels Eight
145
Interface Specifications
Item Specifications
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem at 250 VAC and from other channels at 250
VAC.
Detection level for On 84 VAC to 130 VAC(5)
Detection level for Off 0 VAC to 34 VAC
Input load (contact cleaning) 2 mA at 120 VAC
Input impedance 60 k
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 75 mA typical
100 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card None
Optional fuse 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
Wiring Diagram
Figure C-20: Wiring Diagram for DI, 8-Channel, 120 VAC, Isolated
Carrier
Optional fuse
(Odd no.)
L + 60K System
120
VAC
Source
N -
(Even no.)
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
I/O Terminal block
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Related information
(5) Phase should be considered when applying AC voltage to multiple input channels.
146
Interface Specifications
The Fused I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the DI, 8-channel, 230 VAC, Dry Contact card. An optional terminal block is the
I/O block.
Specifications
Item Specifications
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem at 250 VAC.
Detection level for On > 0.71 mA
Detection level for Off < 0.28 mA
Impedance 238 k
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 75 mA
100 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card 7 mA at 230 VAC
Optional fuse 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
147
Interface Specifications
Wiring Diagram
Figure C-21: Wiring Diagram for DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Dry Contact
Carrier
230 VAC Bussed
field power connection
Optional fuse
L N
Termination I/O Card
Common
(Odd no.) connection
+ for 8 channels
System
-
(Even no.)
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
I/O Terminal block
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Related information
The I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field wiring for
the DI, 8-channel, 230 VAC, Isolated card. An optional terminal block is the Fused I/O
block.
Specifications
Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem at 250 VAC and from other channels at 250
VAC.
Detection level for On 168 VAC to 250 VAC
148
Interface Specifications
Item Specification
Detection level for Off 0 VAC to 68 VAC
Input load (contact cleaning) 1 mA at 230 VAC
Input impedance 238 k
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 75 mA
100 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card None
Optional fuse 2.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
Wiring Diagram
Figure C-22: Wiring Diagram for DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Isolated
Carrier
Optional fuse
(Odd no.)
L + 238K System
230
VAC
Source
N -
(Even no.)
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
I/O Terminal block
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Related information
149
Interface Specifications
Installation Notes
Specifications
Item Specification
Number of channels 32
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Detection level for ON > 2 mA
Detection level for OFF < 0.25 mA
Impedance 5 K
LocalBus current (12VDC nominal), per card 50 mA typical
75 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card 150 mA at 24 VDC (10%)
Series 2: 150 mA at 24 VDC (-15%/+20%)
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
150
Interface Specifications
Wiring Diagram
Figure C-23: Wiring Diagram for DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC Dry Contact
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection
+ -
Termination I/O Card Common
connection
System for 32
channels
32-Channel terminal
block (the numbers
indicate the channel
assigments)
+
1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29
2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30
3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31
4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32
Related information
Installation Notes
The Fused I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for
field wiring for the DO, 8-channel, 24 VDC, High-Side and the Series 2 DO, 8-
channel, 24 VDC, High-Side card in Simplex mode. Optional terminal blocks are the
I/O terminal block, and the 10 and 16-pin mass termination blocks.
If you use a mass termination block with the DO, 8-channel, 24 VDC, High-Side I/O
card, refer to the termination block specifications for the output rating for each
block. Those specifications might be more restrictive than the specifications listed in
Table C-13.
The Redundant Discrete terminal block is recommended to provide screw
terminations for field wiring for the Series 2 DO, 8-channel, 24 VDC, High-Side card.
151
Interface Specifications
When pulse testing is enabled, the LED on the output device may be slightly
illuminated.
Note
Line fault detection is not compatible with significant capacitive loading (cable + load > 30 nF) and
must be disabled under these conditions.
Specifications
Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Output range 2 VDC to 60 VDC
Series 2: 24 VDC 10%
Output rating 1.0 A continuous per channel (inrush 4.0 A for
<100 ms; 6.0 A for <20 ms); 3.0 A maximum per
card
152
Interface Specifications
Item Specification
Optional fuse (Simplex mode only) 2.0 A (inrush 5.0 A for <10 ms at 0.1% duty cy-
cle)
Off-state leakage 1.2 mA maximum
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 100 mA typical
150 mA maximum
Series 2:
90 mA typical
150 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card 3.0 A at 24 VDC (10%)
Configurable channel types:
Discrete Output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output stays in last state submitted
by the controller.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value.
Momentary Output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output finishes current pulse.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value and the channel
is re-configured as a latched output.
Continuous Pulse Output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output continues pulsing.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value and the channel
is re-configured as a latched output.
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
153
Interface Specifications
Wiring Diagrams
Figure C-24: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side in
Simplex Mode
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection
+ -
I/O Card Termination Optional fuse
Common
connection
for 8
channels
(Odd no.)
System
+
Load
-
(Even no.)
I/O Terminal block
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
- 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
154
Interface Specifications
Figure C-25: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side in
Redundant Mode
Carrier
24 VDC Bussed
field power connection
+ - + -
Primary Redundant
I/O card termination
Common
connections
for 8 channels
System Relay
Mode
(Odd no.)
+
Secondary
I/O card
Load
System
-
(Even no.)
Redundant discrete
terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Related information
Installation Notes
The I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the DO, 8-channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card and the Series 2 DO, 8-channel,
24 VDC, Isolated card in Simplex mode. Optional terminal blocks are the Fused I/O
terminal block and 16-pin mass termination block.
155
Interface Specifications
If you use a mass termination block with the DO, 8-channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card,
refer to the termination block specifications for the output rating for each block.
Those specifications might be more restrictive than the specifications listed in the
following table.
Specifications
Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and from each other and factory tested to
1500 VDC.
Output range 2 VDC to 60 VDC
Output rating 1.0 A (inrush 4.0 A for <100 ms; 6.0 A for <20
ms)
Off-state leakage 1.2 mA maximum
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 100 mA typical
150 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card None
Configurable channel types:
Discrete Output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output stays in last state submitted
by the controller.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value.
Momentary Output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output finishes current pulse.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value and the channel
is re-configured as a latched output.
Continuous Pulse Output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output continues pulsing.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value and the channel
is re-configured as a latched output.
Optional fuse 2.0 A (inrush 5.0 A for <10 ms at 0.1% duty cy-
cle)
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
156
Interface Specifications
Wiring Diagram
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
- I/O Terminal block
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Related information
Installation Notes
The Fused I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the DO, 8-channel, 120/230 VAC, High-Side card and the Series 2 DO, 8-channel,
120/230 VAC, High-Side card in Simplex mode. An optional terminal block is the I/O
terminal block.
Specifications
Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem at 250 VAC.
157
Interface Specifications
Item Specification
Output range 20 VAC to 250 VAC
Output rating 1.0 A continuous per channel (inrush 5 A for
< 100 ms; 20 A for < 20 ms)
3.0 A maximum per card up to 5C
2.0 A maximum per card up to 60C
Series 2:
1.0 A continuous per channel (inrush 5 A
for < 100 ms; 20 A for < 20 ms)
3.0 A maximum per card
Optional fuse 2.0 A (inrush 5A for <10 ms at 0.1% duty cycle)
Off state leakage 2 mA maximum at 120 VAC, 4 mA maximum at
230 VAC
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 100 mA typical
150 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card 3.0 A at 120 VAC or 230 VAC per I/O Interface
Configurable channel types:
Discrete Output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output stays in last state submitted
by the controller.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value.
Momentary Output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output finishes current pulse.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value and the channel
is re-configured as a latched output.
Continuous Pulse Output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output continues pulsing.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value and the channel
is re-configured as a latched output.
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
158
Interface Specifications
Wiring Diagram
Figure C-27: Wiring Diagram for DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, High-Side
Carrier
120/230 VAC Bussed AC
field power connection
L N
I/O Card Termination
Optional fuse
Common
connection
for 8 channels (Odd no.)
System +
Load
-
(Even no.)
Related information
Installation Notes
The I/O terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field wiring for
the DO, 8-channel, 120/230 VAC, Isolated card and the Series 2 DO, 8-channel, 120/230
VAC, Isolated card in Simplex mode. An optional terminal block is the Fused I/O block.
Item Specifications
Number of channels Eight
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem at 250 VAC and from other channels at 250
VAC.
Output range 20 VAC to 250 VAC
159
Interface Specifications
Table C-16: DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, Isolated Specifications (continued)
Item Specifications
Output rating 1.0 A continuous per channel (inrush 5 A for
<100 ms; 20 A for <20 ms)
3.0 A maximum per card up to 50C (122F)
2.0 A maximum per card up to 60C (140F)
Series 2:
1.0 A continuous per channel (inrush 5 A
for <100 ms; 20 A for <20 ms)
3.0 A maximum per card
Optional fuse 2.0 A (inrush 5A for <10 ms at 0.1% duty cycle)
Off state leakage 2 mA maximum at 120 VAC
4 mA maximum at 230 VAC
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 100 mA typical
150 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card None
Configurable channel types:
Discrete Output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output stays in last state submitted
by the controller.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value.
Momentary Output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output finishes current pulse.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value and the channel
is re-configured as a latched output.
Continuous Pulse Output If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Hold last value (de-
fault): Output continues pulsing.
If FAIL_ACTION_MODE is Go to configured
failure action mode: Output is driven to the
configured faultstate value and the channel
is re-configured as a latched output.
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
160
Interface Specifications
Wiring Diagram
Figure C-28: Wiring Diagram for DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, Isolated
Carrier
Optional fuse
Load
-(Even no.)
I/O Terminal block
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Related information
Installation Notes
161
Interface Specifications
Specifications
Item Specification
Number of channels 32
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and factory tested to 1500 VDC
Output range 24 VDC (10%)
Series 2: 24 VDC (-15%/+20%)
Output rating 100 mA per channel
Off-state leakage 0.1 mA maximum
LocalBus current (12VDC nominal), per card 100 mA typical
150 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card 3.2 A at 24 VDC (10%)
Series 2: 3.2 A at 24 VDC (-15%/+20%)
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
Wiring Diagram
+ -
I/O Card Termination
Common
connection for
32 channels Load
System
32-Channel terminal
block (the numbers
1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 indicate the channel
assigments)
2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30
3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31
4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32
162
Interface Specifications
Related information
Fieldbus H1
Series 2 H1 (Simplex and Redundant modes)
Installation Notes
Specifications
Item Specification
Number of Ports Two
Port Type Foundation Fieldbus H1 - 31.25 Kbit/second
Isolation Each port is isolated from the system and from
each other and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
LocalBus current (12VDC nominal), per card 400 mA typical, 600 mA maximum
Series 2:
200 mA typical
300 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card None
Fieldbus power (for Series 2 card) 9 to 32 VDC, 12 mA per port
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
163
Interface Specifications
Wiring Diagrams
4-
5+
System 6+
Port 2
7-
8-
Fieldbus H1
terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+ + - - + + - -
Port Port
1 2
164
Interface Specifications
1, 7 (no connection)
2, 8 (no connection)
Port 1
H1
encoder/
decoder
+
3 Port 1 ( )
Port 1
System
-
4 Port 1 ( )
Port 2
+
5 Port 2 ( )
H1 Port 2
encoder/
decoder -
6 Port 2 ( )
Series 2 H1
terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+ - + -
Port Port
1 2
165
Interface Specifications
Primary Redundant
I/O card termination
Port 1
+ 1, 7 (no connection)
H1 encoder/decoder - 2,8 (no connection)
9, 15 (no connection)
System
10, 16 (no connection)
Port 2 + +
H1 encoder/decoder - 3, 11 +
Port 1
Secondary 4, 12 -
I/O card -
Port 1
+
H1 encoder/decoder -
+
System
5, 13 +
Port 2
6, 14 -
Port 2 + -
H1 encoder/decoder -
Redundant H1
terminal block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
+- +-
Port 1 Port 2
+- +-
Port 1 Port 2
Related information
Isolated Input
The DeltaV system supports the Series 2 Isolated Input card in Simplex mode.
The Isolated Input card supports Thermocouple, MilliVolt, RTD, ohms, and Voltage input
ranges.
Installation Notes
The Isolated Input Card uses the Isolated Input Terminal Block to provide terminations for
wiring.
166
Interface Specifications
Specifications
Item Specification
Number of channels Four
Isolation CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.1010.1 or CAN/ Installation Cat II, Pollution degree 2
CSA-C22.2 No.61010.1 Channel to system - 600 VAC double insula-
tion. Each channel is optically isolated from
the system and factory tested to 5000 VDC.
Channel to channel - 600 VAC basic insula-
tion.Each channel is optically isolated from
each other and factory tested to 3100
VDC.(6)
ADC Resolution 16 bit
-3dB Filter Frequency 2.7 Hz
DC/50/60 Hz Common Mode Rejection 120 dB
Input Impedance 10 M
Thermocouple Sensor Types B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T, Uncharacterized
RTD Sensor Types PT100, PT200, Ni120, Cu10, Resistance, User
defined
mV and V ranges Refer to Table C-24 and Table C-27.
Input type mix Independently configurable
Ambient temperature -40 to 70C
Calibration None required
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
LocalBus power rating 12 VDC, 350 mA, no field power required
Table C-19: Isolated Input Card, Thermocouple and MilliVolt Input Specifications
Item Specification
Linearization error 0.003% Full Scale
Cold Junction Compensation Accuracy 1.0C
Cold Junction Compensation types Off, local, remote
Cold Junction Compensation range -40 to 85C
Temperature scale ITS90
Open circuit detection (Thermocouple only) 0.4 A DC
Detection time 1 second
(6) Warning: When hazardous live voltages are present on a channel, adjacent channel wiring must be inaccessible.
167
Interface Specifications
In the 25C Reference Accuracy column in the following table, total error is made up of
reading accuracy, CJC accuracy, and sensor accuracy.
25C Refer-
ence Accura- Temperature Nominal Res- Operating
Sensor Types cy Drift olution Full Scale Range
B 1.2C 0.116C/C 0.09C 250 to 1810C 250 to 1810C
E 0.5C 0.004C/C 0.05C -200 to -200 to
1000C 1000C
J 0.6C 0.005C/C 0.06C -210 to -190 to
1200C 1200C
K 0.5C .013C/C 0.05C -270 to -140 to
1372C 1372C
N 1.0C .015C/C 0.05C -270 to -190 to
1300C 1300C
R 1.7C .083C/C 0.06C -50 to 1768C 0 to 1768C
S 1.8C .095C/C 0.08C -50 to 1768C 0 to 1768C
T 0.7C .025C/C 0.04C -270 to 400C -200 to 400C
Uncharacter- 0.05 mV .0003 mV/C .0031 mV -100 to 100 -100 to 100
ized; no linea- mV mV
rization or CJC
Item Specification
Measurement configurations 2, 3, and 4 wire
Excitation current 100 A DC
Temperature scale ITS90
Open sensor detection time 1 second
Short circuit detection time 1 second
Pt 100 and Pt 200 alpha 0.00385
168
Interface Specifications
Table C-23: Isolated Input Card, RTD, ohms Input Range Specifications
169
Interface Specifications
Wiring Diagram
Excitation
1, 5, 9, 13 current
+
2, 6, 10, 14
4 3 2 TC
wire wire wire
mV
V A/D
To
- Conv.
system
3, 7, 11, 15
4, 8, 12, 16
Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4
Related information
Multifunction
The DeltaV system supports the Multifunction card and the Series 2 Multifunction card in
Simplex mode.
The Multifunction card uses the 32-channel terminal block to provide terminations for
wiring. The following table lists the cable pin out connections for the Multifunction card.
170
Interface Specifications
The Multifunction I/O Card discrete input channel has a switching hysteresis of 80 mV.
Noise signals above this amplitude are detected by the input channel.
Specifications
Item Specification
Number of channels Four
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and from each other and factory tested to
1500 VDC.
Detection level for ON 4.8 VDC (minimum)
Detection level for OFF 1.0 VDC (maximum)
171
Interface Specifications
Item Specification
Input impedance 3 to 25 mA at 5 to 24 VDC
Input accuracy 0.1% reading (over 10 Hz - 50 kHz signals)(7)
Input frequency Sine wave - 10 Hz to 50 kHz
Square wave - 0.1 Hz to 50kHz
Resolution 1 pulse
Minimum pulse width 10 S
Maximum input voltage 26.4 VDC
Resolution counter 32 bits
LocalBus current 250 mA maximum
Series 2: 150 mA maximum
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
Wiring Diagram
Ch Ch Ch Ch
Use 32-channel 1 2 3 4
terminal block (refer
1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29
to table for pin out
connections and
+
channel nomenclature) 2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30
-
3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31
4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32
Related information
(7) For a pulse input channel, filtering may be required to meet the accuracy specification.
172
Interface Specifications
Profibus DP
The DeltaV system supports the Profibus DP card, the Series 2 Profibus DP card in Simplex
mode, and the Series 2 Plus Profibus DP card in Simplex and Redundant modes.
Installation Notes
The Profibus terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the Profibus DP card and Series 2 Profibus DP card in Simplex mode.
The Redundant Profibus DP terminal block is recommended to provide screw
terminations for field wiring for the Series 2 Plus Profibus DP card in Redundant
mode. Do not plug a simplex Profibus DP or Series 2 Profibus DP card into a
Redundant Profibus DP terminal block. For simplex or redundant applications, when
the termination is in the OUT position, pins 1 and 3 and 4 and 6 can be used. When
the termination is in the IN position only pins 1 and 3 can be used.
Series 2 cards require the MD controller when connected to a redundant terminal
block and operated in Redundant mode.
Item Specification
Number of Ports One
Port Type Profibus DP
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 400 mA typical, 600 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card None
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier.
Wiring Diagram
The following figure shows a wiring diagram for the Series 2 Plus Profibus DP card. For a
redundant card, the wiring shown in the I/O Card portion of the image is replicated.
173
Interface Specifications
Figure C-35: Wiring Diagram for Series 2 Plus Profibus DP Card in Simplex or
Redundant Mode
Carrier
1 A1
T in Terminator
System
3 B1
4 A2
T out
6 B2
7 CTS
2, 5, 8 S
Related information
RTD, ohms
The DeltaV system supports the RTD, ohms card and the Series 2 RTD, ohms card in
Simplex mode.
Installation Notes
The RTD, ohms terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the RTD, ohms card.
Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Sensor Types 2-wire, 3-wire, or 4-wire: Resistance, Pt100,
Pt200, Pt500, Ni120, Cu10, user defined
174
Interface Specifications
Item Specification
Full scale signal range Selectable based on sensor. Refer to Table C-28.
LocalBus Power Rating 12 VDC, 160 mA
Ambient Temperature 0 to 60C
Series 2: -40 to 70C
Accuracy over temperature range Refer to Table C-28.
Resolution (Varies with sensor type. Refer to Ta- 16 bits conversion
ble C-32).
Repeatability 0.05% of span
DC/50/60/Hz Common Mode Rejection 120 dB
Calibration None required
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
The following table shows the full scale, operating range, reference accuracy, temperature
drift, and resolution for the RTD, ohms sensor types
(8) The Callendar-Van Dusen linearization equation can be used with user defined Pt RTDs. Refer to Recommended I/O Practices in DeltaV
Books online for usage information.
175
Interface Specifications
Wiring Diagram
Sensor +
4 3 2 A/D
wire Conv. System
wire wire
Sensor -
Circuit
common
RTD, ohms
Terminal block
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 Sensor
excitation
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
+ Sensor
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
- Sensor
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Circuit
common
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
176
Interface Specifications
Sensor +
4 3 2 A/D
wire Conv. System
wire wire
Sensor -
Circuit
common Excitation
current
RTD, ohms
Terminal block
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 Sensor
excitation
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
+ Sensor
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
- Sensor
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Circuit
common
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Related information
Sequence of Events
The DeltaV system supports the Sequence of Events card and the Series 2 Sequence of
Events card in Simplex mode.
Installation Notes
The 32-channel terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the Sequence of Events card and the Series 2 Sequence of Events card in Simplex
mode. The 40-pin mass termination block also can be used. The following table lists the
cable pin out connections for the Sequence of Events card
177
Interface Specifications
An MD controller and Network Time Server are required for a Sequence of Events card.
Specifications
Item Specification
Number of channels 16; each channel can be configured for SOE or
DI operation.
Scan rate 0.25 msec for all 16 channels
Time stamp accuracy (for SOE channels only) 0.25 msec on a card; 1 msec in a controller. Ac-
curacy with reference to system clock time after
a 4 msec debounce filter has been applied.
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and factory tested to 1500 VDC.
Detection level for ON > 2 mA
Detection level for OFF < 0.25 mA
Impedance 5K
178
Interface Specifications
Item Specification
LocalBus current (12VDC nominal), per card 50 mA typical
75 mA maximum
Series 2
75 mA typical
100 mA maximum
Field circuit power, per card 75 mA at 24 VDC (10%)
Series 2: 75 mA at 24 VDC (20%)
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
Wiring Diagram
+ -
Termination I/O card Common
(Odd no.) connection
for 16 channels
+
System
-
(Even no.)
32-Channel
terminal block Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29
+
2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30
-
3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31
+
4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Related information
179
Interface Specifications
The DeltaV Serial Card provides an interface to a variety of serial devices, such as PLCs
(Programmable Logic Controllers) that use the Modbus RTU or ASCII protocol. With the
DeltaV Explorer, you can configure each of the two ports provided on the serial card to
support RS232, RS422/485 half duplex, or RS422/485 full duplex signals and you can
configure the baud rate of each port.
Installation Notes
For CE compliance, use shielded cables to connect the serial card to external
devices. Ground the cable shield at one end only. If the external device does not
provide a mechanism to ground the cable shield, connect the shield to the DeltaV
Carrier Shield Bar. If you use the RS422/485 ports, the shield must also provide the
ground reference for the port. Connect the cable shield to the corresponding
ground (GND) terminal on the interface terminal block.
The Interface terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the Serial card and the Series 2 Serial card in Simplex mode.
The Redundant Interface terminal block is recommended to provide screw
terminations for field wiring for the Series 2 Serial card in Redundant mode.
Refer to ANSI TIA/EIA-485-A for RS485 full duplex termination requirements.
The following tables define the terminal assignments for RS232, RS422/485 half duplex,
and RS422/485 full duplex port types.
Terminal Assignment
Terminal 1 Port 1 GND
Terminal 3 Port 1 TXD
Terminal 5 Port 1 RXD
Terminal 7 Port 1 DTR
Terminal 8 Port 1 DSR
Terminal 9 Port 2 GND
Terminal 11 Port 2 TXD
Terminal 13 Port 2 RXD
Terminal 15 Port 2 DTR
Terminal 16 Port 2 DSR
Terminal Assignment
Terminal 1 Port 1 GND
180
Interface Specifications
Terminal Assignment
Terminal 2 Port 1 DATA+
Terminal 4 Port 1 DATA-
Terminal 9 Port 2 GND
Terminal 10 Port 2 DATA+
Terminal 12 Port 2 DATA-
Note
RS-485 Full Duplex is not supported when the card is configured as a Modbus slave in a multidrop
environment.
Terminal Assignment
Terminal 1 Port 1 GND
Terminal 2 Port 1 TXD+
Terminal 4 Port 1 TXD-
Terminal 6 Port 1 RXD+
Terminal 8 Port 1 RXD-
Terminal 9 Port 2 GND
Terminal 10 Port 2 TXD+
Terminal 12 Port 2 TXD-
Terminal 14 Port 2 RXD+
Terminal 16 Port 2 RXD-
Item Specification
Number of serial ports Two
Port types RS232, RS422/485 half duplex, RS422/485 full
duplex (configurable with the DeltaV Explorer)
Isolation Each port is optically isolated from the system
and from each other and factory tested to 1500
VDC. The ports must be grounded via the exter-
nal device.
Baud rate Configurable with the DeltaV Explorer
Maximum cable lengths RS232: 15 m (50 ft)
RS422/485: 610 m (2000 ft)
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 200 mA typical, 300 mA maximum
181
Interface Specifications
Item Specification
Field circuit power, per card None
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
Figure C-39shows a wiring scheme from Port 1 on the Interface terminal block for a Serial
card and a Series 2 Serial card in Simplex mode to a Modicon Model 984 controller.
The following figure shows an example for connecting a primary and secondary computer
to a Redundant Interface terminal block for a Series 2 Serial card in Redundant mode. For
each computer, use the same wiring scheme as shown in Figure C-39.
182
Interface Specifications
Related information
Thermocouple, mV
The DeltaV system supports the Thermocouple, mV card and the Series 2 Thermocouple,
mV card in Simplex mode.
Installation Notes
Specifications
Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Sensor Types: mV Thermocouple Low level voltage source
B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T, uncharacterized
183
Interface Specifications
Item Specification
Isolation Each channel is optically isolated from the sys-
tem and factory tested to 1500 VDC. Channels 1,
2, 3, and 4 are isolated from channels 5, 6, 7, and
8 (verified by 1500 VDC factory test). Thermo-
couples attached to channels 1, 2, 3,and 4 are
not electrically isolated and should be within
0.7 VDC of each other. Thermocouples attach-
ed to channels 5, 6, 7,and 8 are not electrically
isolated and should be within 0.7 VDC of each
other.
Full scale signal range Selectable based on sensor type. Refer to
Table C-36 .
LocalBus Power Rating 12 VDC, 350 mA
Series 2 12 VDC, 210 mA
Ambient Temperature 0 to 60C
Series 2 -40 to 70C
Accuracy over temperature range (linearized) Thermocouple: Refer to Table C-36 .
mV: Refer to Table C-37 .
Cold Junction Compensation 1C
Resolution (Varies with sensor type. Refer to Ta- 16 bits
ble C-40 ).
Repeatability 0.05% of span
DC/50/60Hz Common Mode Rejection 120 dB
Calibration None required
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
The following table shows specifications for the Thermocouple sensor types.
Note
In the 25 C Reference Accuracy column in the following table, total error is made up of reading
accuracy, CJC accuracy, and sensor accuracy.
184
Interface Specifications
25 C Refer-
Operating ence Accura- Temperature
Sensor Type Full Scale Range cy Drift Resolution
Uncharacter- -100 to 100 -100 to 100 0.1 mV 0.002 mV/C ~ 0.003mV
ized (No linea- mV mV
rization, no
cold junction
compensa-
tion.)
B 250 to 1810C 500 to 1810C 2.4C 0.056C/C ~ 0.18C
E -200 to -200 to 0.6C 0.008C/C ~ 0.07C
1000C 1000C
J -210 to -190 to 0.8C 0.011C/C ~ 0.05C
1200C 1200C
K -270 to -200 to 0.5C 0.016C/C ~ 0.18C
1372C 1372C
N -270 to -190 to 1.0C 0.007C/C ~ 0.10C
1300C 1300C
R -50 to 1768C -50 to 1768C 2.1C 0.013C/C ~ 0.14C
S -50 to 1768C -40 to 1768C 2.2C 0.067C/C ~ 0.24C
T -270 to 400C -200 to 400C 0.7C 0.001C/C ~ 0.04C
25 Refer-
Operating ence Accura- Temperature
Sensor Type Full Scale Range cy Drift Resolution
Low Level -100 to 100 -100 to 100 0.1 mV 0.002 mV/C ~ 0.003 mV
Voltage mV mV
Source
185
Interface Specifications
Wiring Diagram
-
(Even no.)
Thermocouple,
mV terminal block
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Related information
The VIM 2 card mounts in the right slot of a Power / Controller Carrier.
The VIM 2 card requires a controller and a dedicated system power supply (24 VDC).
The Power / Controller Carrier holding a VIM 2 card and power supply must be
installed to the left of the first 8-Wide I/O Carrier on the DIN rail. It can be installed
either to the left or right of the Power / Controller Carrier holding the controller and
its power supply.
This card supports redundancy.
Specifications
Item Specifications
Input power requirement (supplied through the +5 VDC @ 1 A maximum
System Power Supply (24 VDC)
Fuse protection 3.0 A , nonreplaceable internal fuses
186
Interface Specifications
Item Specifications
External connectors VIMNet network: One, 10/100BASE-TX with
RJ45 connector
Redundancy link: One, 10/100BASE-TX with
RJ45 connector
Mounting Right slot of Power / Controller Carrier
Image
Figure C-42: VIM 2 card and power supply on the Power / Controller Carrier
187
Interface Specifications
The I.S. 8-channel terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the I.S. AI, 8-channel, 4-20 mA, HART card. An optional block is the I.S. loop
disconnect 8-channel terminal block.
Specifications
Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
Isolation LocalBus to any channel: 60 VAC
Between channels: None
I.S. channel to non-I.S. rail: 250 VAC
Nominal signal range (span) 4 to 20 mA
Full scale signal range 2 to 22 mA
Valid range for LED indication 0.78 to 21.9 mA
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 600 mA
Line fault detection Short circuit: >21.5 mA
Open circuit: <0.5 mA
Accuracy over temperature range 0.006% of span per C
Accuracy over EMC conditions 1% of span
Resolution 16 bits
Repeatability 0.05% of span
Calibration Not required
Communications Support HART pass-through request/response HART var-
iable report Field device status report
Optional loop disconnect Yes
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
WARNING!
Hand-held, two-way radios should not be keyed within 0.5 M (1.64 ft., 19.7 in.) of Intrinsically
Safe Analog Input cards as the level of radiated emissions from these units can interfere with
the operation of the system.
188
Interface Specifications
Wiring Diagram
Figure C-43: Wiring Diagram for I.S. AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART
I/S Carrier 12 VDC IS
Power
I.S. 8-channel
terminal block
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Related information
Installation Notes
The I.S. 8-channel terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the HART and non-HART versions of the I.S. AO, 8-channel, 4-20 mA card. An
optional block is the I.S. loop disconnect 8-channel terminal block.
Specifications
Item Specification
Number of channels Eight
189
Interface Specifications
Item Specification
Isolation LocalBus to any channel: 60 VAC
Between channels: None
I.S. channel to non-I.S. rail: 250 VAC
Nominal signal range (span) 4 to 20 mA
Full scale signal range 1 to 22 mA
Voltage to load 13 V minimum @ 20 mA
Load resistance 450 maximum 650 maximum with HART
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 630 mA
Open circuit detection threshold 0.7 mA 0.2 mA
Accuracy (@ 25 C) 20 A
Accuracy over temperature range 0.006% of span per C
Accuracy over EMC conditions 0.5% of span
Resolution 12 bits
Output compliance 20 mA stored into 450 load; independent of
supply (non-HART) 20 mA stored into 650
load; independent of supply (HART)
Optional loop disconnect Yes
Calibration Stored on card
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
WARNING!
Before substituting an I.S. AO, 4-20 mA card with an I.S. AO, 4-20 mA, HART card, you must
perform a loop analysis or reassess the field parameters. Refer to the following documents for
valid field parameters:
12P1892, DeltaVTM Scalable Process System Class I Div.2 with Class I, II, III, Div. 1 Field Circuit
Installation Instructions
12P2524, DeltaVTM I.S. I/O Code of Practice for Installation and Maintenance in Zone 2
Hazardous Areas
12P1990, DeltaVTM Scalable Process System with Zone 0 Field Circuits, Installation
Instructions
190
Interface Specifications
Wiring Diagrams
System A/D
Converter -
(Even no.)
I.S. 8-channel
terminal block
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
191
Interface Specifications
Figure C-45: Wiring Diagram for I.S. AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART
System A/D
Converter
-
(Even no.)
I.S. 8-channel
terminal block
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Related information
The I.S. 16-channel terminal block must be used to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the I.S. DI, 16-channel card. If this terminal block is not used, the card will not
communicate with the DeltaV controller.
Specifications
Item Specification
Number of channels Sixteen
Isolation LocalBus to any channel: 60 VAC
Between channels: None
I.S. channel to non-I.S. rail: 250 VAC
Detection level for On >2.1 mA
Detection level for Off <1.2 mA
192
Interface Specifications
Item Specification
Voltage applied to sensor 7.0 to 9.0 V from 1 k 10%
Line fault detection Short circuit: <100
Open circuit: > 50 k
Maximum input frequency 20 Hz
Minimum pulse width detected 45 ms
Output impedance 100 @ > 6 mA (wetting current)
LocalBus current 350 mA
Switching hysteresis 200 A (nominal)
Optional loop disconnect Not offered
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
Wiring Diagram
IS IS Carrier
12 VDC IS
Termination
Power
I.S.16-channel
terminal block
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
+
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
-
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
193
Interface Specifications
Related information
The I.S. 8-channel terminal block is recommended to provide screw terminations for field
wiring for the I.S. DO, 4-channel card. An optional block is the I.S. loop disconnect 8-
channel terminal block.
Specifications
Item Specification
Number of channels Four
Isolation LocalBus to any channel: 60 VAC
Between channels: None
I.S. channel to non-I.S. rail: 250 VAC
Output range 22 V (open circuit) 11 V at 45 mA 25 VDC (maxi-
mum)
Output rating 45 mA (min.)
Off state leakage N/A
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 560 mA
Current limit per channel 45 mA
Configurable channel types Discrete output : Output stays in the last state
submitted by the controller.
Momentary output : Output is active for a pre-
configured time period (100 ms to 100 s).
Continuous pulse output : Output is active as a
percentage of a pre-configured base time peri-
od (100 ms to 100 s). Resolution is 2 ms.
Optional loop disconnect Yes
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
194
Interface Specifications
Wiring Diagram
Loop
disconnect (Odd no.)
IS Power (optional)
System +
Load
Common
connection for
4 channels
-
(Odd no.)
I.S. 8-channel
terminal block
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 (refer to terminal block
specifications for
pin out connections
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
and channel
nomenclature)
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Related information
Terminal Blocks
The DeltaV system supports Terminal Blocks, Redundant Terminal Blocks, Mass
Termination Blocks, and Intrinsically Safe Termination Blocks.
195
Interface Specifications
Note
The terminal blocks contain a latch for quick release. To remove the terminal block, depress the latch
with a screw driver or finger and pull the terminal block down and off.
The following table show specifications for the I/O, Fused I/O, and 4-wire I/O terminal
blocks.
Table C-43: I/O, Fused I/O, and 4-Wire I/O Terminal Block Specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating I/O and fused I/O: 250 VAC and 60 VDC be-
tween non-connected signals for I/O and fused
I/O
4-wire I/O: 30 VDC
Maximum current 1 A per I/O channel
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
196
Interface Specifications
Figure C-48: I/O, Fused I/O, and 4-Wire I/O Terminal Block
Keying depends upon
the card type. Refer to
"I/O Interface Keying"
for key position.
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Front View Bottom View
Specifications
Item Specification
Voltage Rating 32 VDC
Max Current 500 mA
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
The wiring shown in the following figure is for the Fieldbus H1 card.
197
Interface Specifications
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+ + - - + + - -
Port Port
1 2
Note
Change the key position to D5 for the DeviceNet card.
Related information
DeviceNet
Specifications
Item Specification
Voltage Rating 35 VDC
Max Current 500 mA
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
198
Interface Specifications
Cover with
H1 I/O labels
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+Port- +Port-
1 2
The AS-Interface and Serial cards use the Interface terminal block to provide terminations
for wiring.
Specifications
Item Specification
Voltage Rating 35 VDC
Max Current 1.0 A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
199
Interface Specifications
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Port Port
1 2
Specifications
Item Specification
Voltage Rating 10 VAC/DC
Max Current 500 mA
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
200
Interface Specifications
2 6 10 14
+ Sensor +
3 7 11 15
- Sensor -
4 8 12 16
Wire compensation
Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4
Front View Bottom View
Specifications
Item Specification
Voltage Rating 5 VDC
Max Current 100 mA
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
The Profibus terminal block has two terminator positions on the front of the unit.
Terminator OUT is the bottom position; terminator IN is the top position. The terminal
block is shipped in the IN position.
201
Interface Specifications
Terminator in
IN
OUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A1 S B1 A2 S B2 C S
T
S
Front View Bottom View
Gently tug on the jumper to remove it and then push the jumper onto a terminator
position. The location of the terminal block on the segment determines the terminator
position.
202
Interface Specifications
Item Specification
Voltage Rating 5 VDC
Max Current 100 mA
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
Sensor
excitation
Sensor +
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
Sensor -
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
+
Circuit common
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
-
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Front View Bottom View
Specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 5 VDC
Maximum current 100 mA
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
203
Interface Specifications
Thermocouple
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Front View Bottom View
Item Specifications
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 1A
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
204
Interface Specifications
1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29
4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32
Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 100 mA
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
205
Interface Specifications
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
+
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
-
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Front View Bottom View
The following table lists the cable pin out connections for the 16-channel analog input
terminal block.
206
Interface Specifications
The 4-wire 16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block provides 4-wire terminations for
the AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA HART, Series 2 card.
Set the keys on the terminal block to A2 to match the AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA
HART, Series 2 card.
Specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 100 mA per channel
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier.
207
Interface Specifications
CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
+
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Series 2 cards require the MD controller when connected to redundant terminal blocks and
operated in Redundant mode.
Note
The redundant terminal blocks contain a latch for quick release. To remove the terminal block,
depress the latch with a screw driver or finger and pull the terminal block down and off. The
Redundant Interface terminal block contains two latches. To remove the terminal block, depress
both latches and pull the terminal block down and off.
208
Interface Specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum Current 200 mA
Operating Temperature -40C to 60C (-40F to 140F)
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot num-
ber must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For ex-
ample, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.
Figure C-59 shows the Redundant Analog Input terminal block. You can change between
two and four wire connections in groups of four channels. The 2-wire and 4-wire jumpers
on the left are for channels 1-4 and the 2-wire and 4-wire jumpers on the right are for
channels 5-8.
For 4-wire transmitter applications, rotate the jumper module 180 until the Field Type
arrows on the terminal block point to the 4-wire transmitter on the jumper.
209
Interface Specifications
2-WIRE
4-WIRE
(shipped as 2-wire
4-WIRE
2-WIRE
2-WIRE
4-WIRE
transmitter field type)
Front View
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum Current 200 mA
Operating Temperature -40C to 60C (-40F to 140F)
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot num-
ber must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For ex-
ample, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.
210
Interface Specifications
I/O labels
Redundant Analog Output
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Item Specification
Voltage rating 30 VDC
Maximum current 1 A per I/O channel 3 A per card
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot num-
ber must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For ex-
ample, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.
Table C-55 shows the Redundant Discrete terminal block. The key on the Redundant
Discrete terminal block is set to B1 at the factory for use with the Series 2 DI, 8-channel, 24
VDC Dry Contact card. Change the key position to B6 to use this terminal block with the
Series 2 DO, 8-channel, 24 VDC High-Side card.
211
Interface Specifications
I/O labels
Redundant Discrete
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Item Specification
Voltage rating 35 VDC
Maximum Current 500 mA
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot num-
ber must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For ex-
ample, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.
212
Interface Specifications
I/O labels
Redundant H1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
+- +-
Port 1 Port 2
+- +-
Port 1 Port 2
Item Specification
Voltage rating 35 VDC
Maximum Current 1A
Mounting Assigned slots of I/O carrier. The lower slot num-
ber must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For ex-
ample, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.
The Series 2 Serial cards use the Redundant Interface terminal block.
Note
The Redundant Interface terminal block contains two latches for quick release. To remove the
terminal block, depress both latches with a screw driver or finger and pull the terminal block down
and off.
213
Interface Specifications
Front View
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
Refer to card
specifications for pin out
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 connections and channel
nomenclature.
Bottom View
Refer to the tables in the Serial Card topic for information on the terminal assignments.
Related information
Item Specification
Voltage rating 5 VDC
Maximum Current 100 mA
214
Interface Specifications
Item Specification
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier. The lower slot num-
ber must be odd and the upper slot number
must be the next higher even number. For ex-
ample, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5
and 6 are valid pairs. Slots 2 and 3 are not a valid
pair.
The Series 2 Plus Profibus DP cards in Redundant mode use the Redundant Profibus DP
terminal block.
Notes
Do not plug a simplex Series 1 or Series 2 Profibus DP card into a Redundant Profibus DP terminal
block. Only redundant Series 2 Plus Profibus DP cards can be used with the Redundant Profibus DP
terminal block.
For simplex or redundant applications, when the termination is in the OUT position, pins 1 and 3 and
4 and 6 can be used. When the termination is in the IN position only pins 1 and 3 can be used.
The Redundant Profibus DP terminal block contains two latches for quick release. To remove the
terminal block, depress both latches with a screw driver or finger and pull the terminal block down
and off.
Terminator In
Terminator Out
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Front View
215
Interface Specifications
Gently tug on the jumper to remove it and then push the jumper onto a terminator
position. The location of the terminal block on the segment determines the terminator
position.
The DeltaV mass termination blocks allow you to connect external marshalling panels and
termination assemblies to your DeltaV system, significantly reducing wiring costs. The
mass termination blocks provide a method to route the wiring within an enclosure and are
used with low-level signals that are conducted over either 0.093 mm2 (28 AWG) off-the-
shelf, flat ribbon cable or round instrument cable. For distances over 3 m, standard 20-pin
round ribbon cable, 0.14 mm2 (26 AWG) is available. These mass termination blocks
interface to a feed-through IDC-to-discrete-wire module such as the Phoenix Contact
FLKM20 VARIOFACE ribbon connector module. For more information on these modules,
visit the Phoenix Contact website. The Phoenix Contact FLKM20 VARIOFACE ribbon
connector module is an Emerson Alliance Program product.
The 40-Pin Mass Termination Block interfaces to either the DI or DO Mass Connection
Solutions through the same ribbon cable or round ribbon cable with 20-pin connectors.
216
Interface Specifications
Specifications
Item Specification
Models 10-pin mass termination block 16-pin mass ter-
mination block 24-pin mass termination block
40-pin mass termination block
Voltage rating 30 VDC between non-connected signals
Maximum current 1 A per I/O channel (16-pin, 40-pin) 1 A per ca-
ble (10-pin, 24-pin)
Maximum flat ribbon cable length 3 m (9.8 ft)
Maximum round ribbon cable length 6 m (19.6 ft)
Mounting Assigned slot of I/O carrier
Key position Set key position based on I/O card type. Factory
settings:
10-pin: B 6
16-pin: A 1
24-pin: A 3
40-pin: B 3
Note
The above specifications might be more restrictive than the specifications listed for the DI, 8-
channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card, the DO, 8-channel, 24 VDC, Isolated card, and the DO, 8-channel, 24
VDC, High-Side card.
217
Interface Specifications
The two-row header accepts a 10-pin 0.093 mm2 (28 AWG) ribbon cable with 2x5 header
connectors (AMP part #1658622-1, Strain Relief #499252-5) that can interface to a
Phoenix Contact UMK-8 RM Series VARIOFACE output module or other similar modules.
The following table lists the cable pin out connections for the 10-pin mass termination
block.
The following table lists the cable pin out connections for the 16-pin mass termination
block.
218
Interface Specifications
Table C-61: 16-Pin Mass Termination Block Cable Pin Out (continued)
CAUTION!
When using a 24-pin ribbon cable, there must be a slight fold in the cable at the cover opening.
Damage might occur if the cable is pinched by the cover.
219
Interface Specifications
Table C-62: 24-Pin Mass Termination Block Cable Pin Out (continued)
Note
The 24 VDC return for the Analog Devices 7 V power supply must be connected to the DeltaV 24
VDC return.
The 40-pin mass termination block has two, 20-pin IDC headers that split the 32 channels
into two, 16-channel headers. Both of the two-row headers accept a 20-pin 1-for-1
passthrough, 0.093 mm2 (28 AWG) ribbon cable with 2x10 header connectors (AMP part
#1658622-4, Strain Relief #499252-2). The assembly interfaces to a feed-through IDC-to-
discrete-wire module such as the Phoenix Contact 2281047 FLKM20 VARIOFACE ribbon
connector module. The Phoenix Contact 2281047 FLKM20 VARIOFACE ribbon connector
module is an Emerson Alliance Program product. Phoenix Contact provides two ways to
connect to the 20-pin connection:
A 20-pin to 2x14-pin configuration cable that connects to all 8-channel digital input
and output modules. These modules include the PLC-RELAY with V-8 adapter, fuse,
feed-through and relay (both solid-state (SSR) and electromechanical relays (EMR)).
A 20-pin 1-for-1 cable that is connected to 16-channel modules. These modules
include feed-through, fuse, relay, (SSR and EMR) and relay modules with fuses on
the relay contact commons.
The 40-pin mass termination block can also interface to the DO and DI Mass Connection
Solutions as well as to the Pepperl+Fuchs HiD Series Boards if IS Barriers are required. The
Pepperl+Fuchs HiD Series Boards are Emerson Alliance Program products.
220
Interface Specifications
The return connection is made internally when the 40-pin mass termination block is used
with Series 2 DI and DO 32-channel cards. No external wire is required. Refer to the cards
installation notes for more information.
CAUTION!
When using a 24-pin ribbon cable, there must be a slight fold in the cable at the cover opening.
Damage might occur if the cable is pinched by the cover.
The 40-pin mass termination block has two, 20-pin IDC headers that split the 16 channels
into two, 8-channel headers. Both of the two-row headers accept a 20-pin 1-for-1
passthrough, 0.093 mm2 (28 AWG) ribbon cable with 2x10 header connectors (AMP part
#1658622-4, Strain Relief #499252-2). The assembly interfaces to a feed-through IDC-to-
discrete-wire module such as the Phoenix Contact 2281047 FLKM20 VARIOFACE ribbon
connector module. Phoenix Contact provides the following way to connect to the 20-pin
connection:
A 20-pin to 14-pin configuration cable that connects to all 8-channel digital input
modules. These modules include the PLC-RELAY with V-8 adapter, fuse, feed-
through and relay (both solid-state (SSR) and electromechanical relays (EMR)).
221
Interface Specifications
Table C-63: 40-Pin Mass Termination Block Cable Pin Out (continued)
Related information
The DI Mass Connection Board (single) provides an interface to the simplex Series 2
DI, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact card used with the M-series 40-Pin Mass
Termination Block.
Two DI Mass Connection Boards (single) (DI Mass Connection Solution (two)) are
required to provide the interface to all 32 channels on the Series 2 DI, 32-Channel,
24 VDC, Dry Contact card.
Two, 20-pin ribbon cables (one per board) connect between the DI Mass Connection
Solution (two) and the 40-pin Mass Termination Blocks.
Four screw terminals provide the connections for +24 VDC power and ground.
For dry contact mode, connect your device to the screw terminals labeled A1 - A16
and to the screw terminals labeled B1-B16. Refer to Figure C-67 for a wiring diagram.
222
Interface Specifications
For isolated power mode, connect your device to the even numbered screw
terminals labeled B1-B16 and connect external ground to the ground bar. Refer to
Figure C-68 for a wiring diagram.
Specifications
Item Specification
Field circuit power per board +24VDC 10% @ 75mA typical,100mA maxi-
mum
Channel type Discrete Input, +24 VDC Dry Contact; detection
on the - signal
Number of channels 16
Isolation The field wiring connections are galvanically iso-
lated from the DI Card circuits and factory tes-
ted to 1000 VDC. No Channel-to-Channel isola-
tion.
Detection Level for ON > 2 mA @ 24 VDC
Source impedance 5 K
Source voltage +24 VDC Input Power, Current Limited with re-
settable fuse
Dimensions Height: 8.6 cm (3.4 in.)
Width: 12.2 cm (4.8 in.)
Depth: 4.8 cm (1.9 in.)
223
Interface Specifications
Power
status LED
224
Interface Specifications
GND
TERMINATION DI BOARD
Yellow
A1 ... A16
+
0.16A
System
2.7K 2.7K
B1 ... B16
GND
225
Interface Specifications
GND
TERMINATION DI BOARD
Yellow
A1 ... A16
0.16A
System
+ + 2.7K 2.7K
B1 ... B16
24
VDC
Source
GND
The DO Mass Connection Board (single) provides an interface to the DO, 32-
Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side, Series 2 card used with the M-series 40-Pin Mass
Termination Block.
Two DO Mass Connection Boards (single) (DO Mass Connection Solution (two)) are
required to provide the interface to all 32 channels on the DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC,
High-Side, Series 2 card.
Two, 20-pin ribbon cables (one per board) connect between the DO Mass
Connection Solution (two) and the 40-pin Mass Termination Blocks.
Four screw terminals provide the connections for +24 VDC power and ground.
Two rows of four screw terminals and a fuse for each channel enables either isolated
relay contact or +24 VDC high-side output mode. Ensure that the jumpers are set for
the correct mode for each output. Refer to the figures for wiring diagrams.
Channel fuses and relays can be replaced in the field.
226
Interface Specifications
Specifications
Item Specification
Power for +24 VDC high-side outputs (optional) +24 VDC 10% @ 10 A maximum
Control signal current per channel (derived from 14 mA maximum
the DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side, Series 2
Plus card.)
Channel type Relay output
Number of channels 16
Output channel options and ratings Isolated relay contacts: 250 VAC/24 VDC
maximum @ 5 A maximum per channel.
+24 VDC High Side: 5 A maximum per chan-
nel, 10 A maximum per board.
Isolation Isolated relay contacts: Isolated at 250 VAC
and factory tested to 3600 VDC (channel to
system and channel to channel).
+24 VDC High Side: Isolated at 250 VAC and
factory tested to 3600 VDC (channel to sys-
tem). No channel to channel isolation.
Dimensions Height: 8.6 cm (3.4 in.)
Width: 29.2 cm (11.5 in.)
Depth: 5.6 cm (2.2 in.)
Field connectors
227
Interface Specifications
+24 VDC +
Green
+24 VDC
+ 4.7K
12A Fuse
GND
GND
DO BOARD TERMINATION
COM
+
6.3A Fuse
VDC
or VAC
4.7K Yellow Source
NO
System
Load
NC
GND
228
Interface Specifications
+24 VDC +
Green
+24 VDC
+ 4.7K
12A Fuse
GND
GND
DO BOARD TERMINATION
COM
6.3A Fuse
4.7K Yellow
+
NO
System
+ Load
NC
GND
229
Interface Specifications
230
Interface Specifications
Specifications
Item Specification
Voltage rating 250 VAC between I.S. and non-I.S. circuits.
Maximum current Refer to the specifications table for the I.S. card
in use.
Mounting Assigned slot of I.S. I/O carrier.
The following table lists the cable pin out connections for the I.S. 8-Channel Terminal Block
and shows the channel nomenclature for the I.S. analog input and output cards (AI, 2-20
mA, 8-Channel with HART, AO, 2-20 mA, 8-Channel) and the discrete output card (DO, 4-
Channel).
Table C-67: I.S. 8-Channel Terminal Block Cable Pin Outs and Channel Nomenclature
231
Interface Specifications
Table C-67: I.S. 8-Channel Terminal Block Cable Pin Outs and Channel Nomenclature
(continued)
Item Specification
Voltage rating 250 VAC between I.S. and non-I.S. circuits.
Maximum current Refer to the specifications table for the I.S. card
in use.
Mounting Assigned slot of I.S. I/O carrier.
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
+
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
-
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
+
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
-
Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch Ch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Front View Bottom View
The following table lists the cable pin out connections for the I.S.16-channel terminal
block.
232
Interface Specifications
Table C-70: Non-I.S. I/O Card Keying and Compatible I/O Terminal Blocks
233
Interface Specifications
Table C-70: Non-I.S. I/O Card Keying and Compatible I/O Terminal Blocks (continued)
234
Interface Specifications
Table C-70: Non-I.S. I/O Card Keying and Compatible I/O Terminal Blocks (continued)
235
Interface Specifications
Table C-70: Non-I.S. I/O Card Keying and Compatible I/O Terminal Blocks (continued)
236
Interface Specifications
Table C-70: Non-I.S. I/O Card Keying and Compatible I/O Terminal Blocks (continued)
Note
Note When the Thermocou-
When the Thermocou- ple, mV card is plug-
ple, mV card is plug- ged into an I/O termi-
ged into a Thermocou- nal block, it functions
ple terminal block, it as an mV card.
functions as a Thermo-
couple card.
237
Interface Specifications
(9) The I.S. DI, 16-channel card will not communicate with the DeltaV controller unless the I.S. 16-channel terminal block is used.
238
DeltaV Controllers and the Remote Interface Unit
Appendix D
DeltaV Controllers and the Remote Interface
Unit
Topics covered in this appendix:
Controller Specifications
Remote Interface Unit
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
Fiber-Optic Media Converter
This appendix provides specifications for the controller and specifications and installation
information for the Remote Interface Unit and the Fiber-Optic Media Converter. It also
explains how to install an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) to backup the controller.
Controller Specifications
Specifications
The following table shows specifications for the MD, MD Plus, MX, and MQ controllers.
239
DeltaV Controllers and the Remote Interface Unit
Specifications
The following table shows specifications for the Remote Interface Unit.
Item Specification
Power requirement (supplied by system power +3.3 VDC at 500 mA maximum +5 VDC at 200
supply through 2-wide power/controller carrier) mA maximum
Fuse protection 3.0 A, non-replaceable fuses
Power dissipation 3.0 W maximum
Mounting On right slot of power/controller carrier
240
DeltaV Controllers and the Remote Interface Unit
The Remote Interface Unit mounts in the controller slot of a 2-wide carrier and has
redundant ethernet connections to the DeltaV Control Network switch or hub. Connect
the primary port to the primary switch or hub and the secondary port to the secondary
switch or hub. The primary Control Network connection is capable of 10/100Mbit ethernet
while the secondary connection is limited to 10Mbit ethernet.
The UPS must be mounted upright on a level surface, such as a floor or a work surface, for
proper operation. The UPS is not rack-mountable or DIN rail-mountable.
The type of DeltaV System Power Supply determines how the UPS backs up controller
power.
If you use a System Power Supply (AC/DC) to provide power to your controller, one UPS
backs up one controller. Install the UPS between the AC main power source and the system
power supply (or supplies), as shown in the following figure.
241
DeltaV Controllers and the Remote Interface Unit
Figure D-3: UPS Installation for Controller Power Backup [System Power Supply (AC/
DC)]
If you use a combination of the Bulk AC to 12 VDC Power Supply and a System Power
Supply (Dual DC/DC) to provide power to your controller(s), use one UPS to back up each
controller for maximum backup time. However, if you do not require maximum backup
time, one UPS can back up as many as four controllers. Install the UPS between the AC
main power source and the bulk power supply, as shown in the following figure.
242
DeltaV Controllers and the Remote Interface Unit
Figure D-4: UPS Installation for Controller Power Backup [System Power Supply
(Dual DC/DC)]
Note
If you use the UPS as backup for your DeltaV Controller, only the system power is backed up; no field
power backup is provided. If you require backup field power, you need additional UPSs to back up
power connected to the I/O interface carrier(s).
If you have a system with only one controller that is powered by a DeltaV System Power
Supply (AC/DC), you can use the smaller Liebert PowerSure 250 VA UPS for controller
power backup. If you have a system with a server, you can use the larger Liebert
PowerSure 1400 VA UPS for server power backup. The 250 VA UPS is for controller
backup only and the 1400 VA UPS for server backup only. The 600 VA UPS is required for
workstation backup.
The 250 VA UPS and 1400 VA UPS are not standard Emerson Process Management
products; you can purchase them from a local supplier. Refer to the documentation
supplied with your UPS for specifications.
243
DeltaV Controllers and the Remote Interface Unit
Item Specification
LAN interface Ethernet IEEE802.3 compatible
Port interface 10BaseT RJ45 compatible
Data rate 10 MBPS
Fiber interface 10Base-FL compatible
Fiber type Multimode 62.5/125 microns
LocalBus current (12 VDC nominal), per card 250 mA typical
300 mA maximum
The media converter mounts on a 2-wide carrier next to (or close to) the controller and
connects to the controller with two standard 12 to 16 inch twisted pair cables with
shielded connectors on both ends of the cable. The four fiber-optic cables connect
transmit to receive between the Workstations media converter and the controllers media
converter as shown in the following figure. The dimensions for the fiber-optic media
converter case are the same as the controller case. The connectors on the media converter
extend one half inch above the case.
244
DeltaV Controllers and the Remote Interface Unit
To 10Base-FL
2 fiber optic hub or
media converter
1 1 2 3
Power
Error
Pri F Link
Pri C Link
Sec F Link Pri Sec
Sec C Link
Bottom View
Notes:
1. Fiber Optic Media Converter may go in position 1, 2, or 3; but is shown mounted in position 2.
2. Fiber Optic cables connect transmit to receive and receive to transmit.
Related information
245
DeltaV Controllers and the Remote Interface Unit
246
System Power Supply Specifications
Appendix E
System Power Supply Specifications
Topics covered in this appendix:
System Power Supply (AC/DC)
System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC)
Intrinsically Safe System Power Supply
Item Specification
Input 100 VAC to 264 VAC, 47 Hz to 63 Hz, single-
phase
Inrush (soft start) 230 VAC input at 35 A peak maximum for one
cycle or less
Output power 25 W total at 60C
Output voltages (25 W maximum) +12 VDC at 2.1 A maximum
+5 VDC at 2.0 A maximum
+3.3 VDC at 0.5 A maximum
Combined 5 VDC and 3.3 VDC output = 10 W
maximum
Input protection Internally fused, non-replaceable fuses
Overvoltage protection Output protected at 110% to 120%
Hold-up time Output remains within 5% of nominal at full load
and 115 VAC input for 20 ms.
Mounting On either slot of 2-wide power/controller carrier
External connectors:
Primary power AC input, 3-wire
247
System Power Supply Specifications
Item Specification
Alarm contacts 2-wire normally open relays; relays are closed
when outputs are within 4% of nominal; 30
VDC at 2.0 A, 250 VAC at 2.0 A
Dimensions
Note
Ground connection is not required for the secondary 2-wide power/controller carrier.
248
System Power Supply Specifications
Redundant Connections
Figure E-2: Redundant AC Input Power for System Power Supply (AC/DC)
Wire Legend:
G Ground (AC)
N Neutral (AC)
AC Power Distribution L Line (AC)
G
N
I/O Subsystem
L
Isolated Common
Ground Reference
Field Cable
Primary Shield Ground
Power Supply
Specifications
249
System Power Supply Specifications
Specifications
250
System Power Supply Specifications
Dimensions
WARNING!
Always remove input power to the supply before connecting or disconnecting the input power
connection. The connector should not interrupt current flow and could be damaged if actuated
under a load condition.
251
System Power Supply Specifications
Redundant Connections
Figure E-4: Redundant DC Input Power and Grounding for System Power Supply
(Dual DC/DC)
Isolated Common
Ground Reference
Dedicated Isolated
Plant Ground Power Return
Grid Point Connection Point
_
Primary _ Secondary
Bulk Bulk
Power Supply Power Supply
+ +
_ _ _ _
+ + + +
Item Specification
Input 18.5 to 36 VDC (24 VDC nominal)
Output 12 VDC 5%
252
System Power Supply Specifications
Item Specification
Output current 5A
Input to output isolation 250 VAC rms
Holdup time 1.8 ms
Input protection Internally fused, non-replaceable fuses
Over voltage protection 110% to 120%
Input power 80 Watts
Mounting I.S. Power Supply Carrier
External connectors DC input 2-part screw terminal
Dimensions
253
System Power Supply Specifications
254
Workstation and Server Specifications
Appendix F
Workstation and Server Specifications
Topics covered in this appendix:
Primary and Secondary Channel Ethernet Card Specifications - Plant LAN
Interface Card
Fault-Tolerant Server
Multiple Monitors
Touch Screens
Fault-Tolerant Server
The Stratus ftServer 4500 can be used as a hardware platform for DeltaV Application
stations. This server provides fault-tolerance through redundancy of the major hardware
sub-systems (CPU/Memory, PCI Bus, storage, and power supplies).
Refer to the "Installing the Fault Tolerant Server" topic. Refer to earlier versions of this
DeltaV manual for information on installing other ftServer models. For information on
configuring the ftServer 4500 to run the DeltaV system, refer to DeltaV Books Online. For
complete technical information on the fault-tolerant servers, refer to the Stratus hardware
and software manuals and to the electronic documentation installed on the servers.
Related information
255
Workstation and Server Specifications
Multiple Monitors
The DeltaV system can support up to four monitors that work together like one large
screen and are driven by the same workstation. Multiple monitors can be laid out in a
horizontal orientation (1x2, 1x3, 1x4) or a square orientation (2x2). Other monitor
arrangements are not supported. Refer to the video card manufacturers documentation
for information on how to install the video cards and remove any existing video cards. The
NEC MultiSync LCD 2080UX+ is approved for use in a multiple monitor system. Refer to
Books Online for information on installing the driver and video card and setting up the
video card for multiple monitors.
Touch Screens
Touch screens can be used on single monitors and on multiple monitors.Connect a cable
from any USB connector on the back of the workstation to a touch screen monitor in any
order or sequence. The NEC MultiSync LCD 2080UX with integrated capacitive
touchscreen is approved for use with the DeltaV system. After connecting the touch
screen monitors, refer to the 3M TouchWare Software for Windows User Guide for
complete information on calibrating and configuring the touch screens
256
Control Network Specifications
Appendix G
Control Network Specifications
Topics covered in this appendix:
Third Party Hubs, Switches, and Cable
DeltaV Fiber Switches
DeltaV Smart Switches and Media Modules
Ethernet Cable Specifications and Installation Rules
DeltaV Control Networks
Example Networks with DeltaV Smart Switches
DeltaV Controller Firewall
The Management Station
Managing Switches and the DeltaV Controller Firewall
Reserved DeltaV IP Addresses
DeltaV Zones
1420 Wireless Gateway
This appendix provides information and specifications for the DeltaV Control Network.
Refer to the following sources for current DeltaV Network configuration details:
DeltaV Product Data Sheets and the DeltaV Site Preparation Guide and System
Planning Guide
The network equipment manufacturers specifications
Your local Emerson Process Management representative
Important
DeltaV systems require a specific version of Cisco switch software and a special switch
configuration. The use of other versions of the switch software or an improperly configured switch
could cause serious problems with the operation of the DeltaV system. Switches ordered from
Emerson Process Management are shipped with the supported software version and are pre-
configured to operate properly with the DeltaV system. To ensure that you have the proper switch
configuration and the correct switch software for your DeltaV system, you should purchase the
switch though normal Emerson channels. The DeltaV supported software version of the switch may
not be the version that is currently shipping on off-the-shelf Cisco switches.
257
Control Network Specifications
If you want to verify the configuration of a switch supplied by Emerson Process Management, refer to
the System Administration and Maintenance manual in the DeltaV Books Online. This
documentation provides written examples of correct, DeltaV specific switch configuration for the
supported revision level of the switch software. Emerson Process Management does not provide the
Cisco operating software separately for field configuration. If you purchase Cisco switches from
sources other than Emerson Process Management, the switch must be configured to DeltaV
instructions and the supplier is responsible for ensuring that the switch software is at the supported
revision level.
Cisco switches can be managed from a Management station. Refer to the Managing Cisco
Switches topic in DeltaV Books Online.
Related information
Item Specification
Model 3Com OfficeConnectTM Hub 8/TPO
(3C16700A)
Type 10BASE-T Ethernet (3C16440A)
Table G-2: 8-Port Twisted Pair Managed Switch with 1 MTRJ Fiber-Optic Port
Item Specification
Model Cisco 8-Port Twisted Pair with 1, MTRJ Fiber-Op-
tic Port(1)
WS 2940-8TF
(1) Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Hubs, Switches, and Cable.
258
Control Network Specifications
Table G-2: 8-Port Twisted Pair Managed Switch with 1 MTRJ Fiber-Optic Port
(continued)
Item Specification
Type 8, 10/100 BASE-T Ethernet
1, 100BASE- FX Fiber-Optic
1, Gigabit SFP-based port
Note
Either the 100BASE-FX port or the Gigabit SFP-
based port can be used. Both ports cannot be
used at the same time.
The following two figures show the front and rear views of the 8-port 10/100Mbit
managed switch with 1 MTRJ Fiber-Optic port.
Figure G-1: Front View of the 8-Port 10/100Mbit Managed Switch with 1 MTRJ Fiber-
Optic Port
Figure G-2: Rear View of the 8-Port 10/100Mbit Managed Switch with 1 MTRJ Fiber-
Optic Port
Item Specification
Model Cisco 24-Port MTRJ Fiber-Optic Switch(2)
(WS-C3550-24-FX-SMI)
(2) Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Hubs, Switches, and Cable
259
Control Network Specifications
Item Specification
Type 100Mbit Fiber Ethernet
The following figures show the front and rear views of the 24-port 100Mbit fiber switch.
RJ-45
Console port
Table G-4: 10/100Mbit 24-Port Switch with 2 MTRJ Fiber-Optic Ports Specifications
Item Specification
Model Cisco 24-Port Twisted Pair with 2, MTRJ Fiber-
Optic Ports(3)
(WS-C2950C-24)
Type 24, 10/100BASE-T Ethernet
2, 100BASE-FX Fiber-Optic
The following figures show the front and rear views of the 24-port 10/100Mbit switch with
2 MTRJ Fiber-Optic Ports.
(3) Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Hubs, Switches, and Cable.
260
Control Network Specifications
Figure G-5: Front View of the 24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with 2 MTRJ Fiber-Optic
Ports
Figure G-6: Rear View of the 24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with 2 MTRJ Fiber-Optic
Ports
RJ-45
Console port
Item Specification
Model Cisco 24-Port Twisted Pair(4)
(WS-C2950-24)
Type 10/100BASE-T Ethernet
The following figure shows the front view of the 24-port switch. The rear view is the same
as the 24-port 10/100Mbit switch with 2 MTRJ fiber-optic ports.
10/100 Ports
Note
Refer to the Cisco documentation for more detailed specifications
(4) Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Hubs, Switches, and Cable.
261
Control Network Specifications
Item Specification
Model Cisco 12-port SFP managed(5)
(Catalyst 3750G-12S)
Type 12-port Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP) Man-
aged switch
The following figures show the front and rear views of the 12-port SFP managed switch.
SFP slots
Table G-6: 24-Port Fiber Managed Switch with 2 SFP Gigabit Slots
Item Specification
Model Cisco 24-port fiber-optic managed switch with
100BASE-FX fiber ports and 2 Small Form-Factor
Pluggable (SFP) Gigabit slots(6)
(Catalyst 3750-24FS)
(5) Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration on Third Party Hubs, Switches, and Cable.
(6) Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Hubs, Switches, and Cable.
262
Control Network Specifications
Table G-6: 24-Port Fiber Managed Switch with 2 SFP Gigabit Slots (continued)
Item Specification
Type 24, 100BASE-FX fiber-optic
2, SFP gigabit
The following figures show the front and rear views of the 24-port fiber managed switch
with 2 SFP gigabit slots.
Figure G-10: Front View of the 24-Port Fiber Managed Switch with 2 SFP Gigabit Slots
Catalyst 3750
Figure G-11: Rear View of the 24-Port Fiber Managed Switch with 2 SFP Gigabit Slots
DC INPUTS FOR REMOTE
POWER SUPPLY RATING
SPECIFIED IN MANUAL 100-240V ~
CONSOLE 3A-1.5A, 50-60 HZ
STACK 1 STACK 2
WARNING
Item Specification
Model Cisco 24-port twisted pair managed switch with 2 SFP gigabit slots
(Catalyst 3750-24TS)(7)
Type 24, 10/100 twisted pair managed
2, SFP gigabit slots
The following figures show the front and rear views of the 24-port twisted pair managed
switch with 2 SFP gigabit slots.
(7) Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Hubs, Switches, and Cable.
263
Control Network Specifications
Figure G-12: Front View of the 24-Port Twisted Pair Managed Switch with 2 SFP
Gigabit Slots
Catalyst 3750
Figure G-13: Rear View of the 24-Port Twisted Pair Managed Switch with 2 SFP
Gigabit Slots
WARNING DC INPUTS FOR REMOTE
POWER SUPPLY
RATING SPECIFIED IN MANUAL
CONSOLE 100-240V ~
1.2A-0.0a, 50-60 HZ
STACK 1 STACK 2
Item Specification
Model Allied Telesyn 8-port unmanaged switch (AT-
FS708)
Type 8, 10/100 twisted pair unmanaged
Front View
The following figure shows the front view of the 8-port twisted pair unmanaged switch.
Figure G-14: Front View of the 8-Port Twisted Pair Unmanaged Switch
Allied Telesyn
POWER
AT-FS708 LINK/ACT
100M AUTO
MD/MDIX
FDX
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
10/100 Ports
264
Control Network Specifications
Table G-8: 8-Port Twisted Pair Unmanaged Switch with One Fiber Port
Item Specification
Model Allied Telesyn 8-port unmanaged switch (AT-
FS709FC)
Type 8, 10/100 twisted pair unmanaged 1, 100BASE-
FX
Front View
The following figure shows the front view of the 8-port twisted pair unmanaged switch
with one fiber port.
Figure G-15: Front View of the 8-Port Twisted Pair Unmanaged Switch with One
Fiber Port
10/100 Ports (MDI/MDIX)
use one port only
LINK/ACT
100 M
FDX
Item Specification
Model Cisco 8-Port 10/100Mbit twisted pair (Catalyst
2960-8TC-L)(8)
(8) Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Hubs, Switches, and Cable.
265
Control Network Specifications
Item Specification
Type 8, 10/100Mbit twisted pair ports
1, gigabit multi-function port that can be used as ei-
ther a 10/100/1000Mbit twisted pair port or a SFP-
based port.
Note
Either the twisted pair port or the SFP-based port can be
used. Both ports cannot be used at the same time.
The following figure shows the front view of the 8-port 10/100Mbit switch with one gigabit
multi-function port.
Figure G-16: Front View of the 8-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with one Gigabit Multi-
function Port
Item Specification
Model Cisco 24-Port 10/100Mbit twisted pair(9)
(Catalyst 2960-24TT-L)
Type 24, 10/100Mbit twisted pair ports
2, 10/100/1000Mbit RJ45 twisted pair ports
The following figures show the front and rear views of the 24-port 10/100Mbit switch with
two RJ45 gigabit uplink ports.
(9) Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Hubs, Switches, and Cable.
266
Control Network Specifications
Figure G-17: Front View of the 24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with two RJ45 Ports
Figure G-18: Rear View of the Cisco 2960 24 and 48 Port Models
RJ45
console port
Table G-10: 24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with two Gigabit Multi-Function Ports
Item Specification
Model Cisco 24-Port 10/100Mbit twisted pair(10)
(Catalyst 2960-24TC-L)
Type 24, 10/100Mbit twisted pair ports
2, gigabit multi-function ports. Each multi-
function port can be used as either a 10/
100/1000Mbit twisted pair port or a SFP-
based port.
Note
Each multi-function port can be used as either
twisted pair or SFP. Both port types cannot be
used at the same time.
Front View
The following figure shows the front view of the 24-port 10/100Mbit switch with two
gigabit multi-function ports.
(10) Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Hubs, Switches, and Cable.
267
Control Network Specifications
Figure G-19: Front View of the 24-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with two Gigabit Multi-
function Ports
Item Specification
Model Cisco 48-Port twisted pair(11)
(Catalyst 2960-48TT-L)
Type 48, 10/100Mbit twisted pair ports
2, RJ45 10/100/1000Mbit twisted pair ports
Front View
The following figure shows the front view of the 48-port 10/100Mbit switch with two RJ45
gigabit uplink ports.
Figure G-20: Front View of the 48-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with two RJ45 Ports
(11) Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Hubs, Switches, and Cable.
268
Control Network Specifications
Table G-12: 48-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with two Gigabit Multi-Function Ports
Item Specification
Model Cisco 48-Port 10/100Mbit twisted pair(12)
(Catalyst 2960-48TC-L)
Type 48, 10/100Mbit twisted pair ports
2, gigabit multi-function ports that can be
used as either a 10/100/1000Mbit twisted
pair port or a SFP-based port.
Note
Each multi-function port can be used as either
twisted pair or SFP. Both port types cannot be
used at the same time.
Front view
The following figure shows the front view of the 48-port 10/100Mbit switch with two
gigabit multi-function ports.
Figure G-21: Front View of the 48-Port 10/100Mbit Switch with two Gigabit Multi-
function Ports
Item Specification
Model Cisco Fiber-Optic Gigabit Transceivers (GLC-LH-
SM and GLC-SX-MM)
(12) Refer to the important information about Cisco switch configuration in Third Party Hubs, Switches, and Cable.
269
Control Network Specifications
Item Specification
Type: GLC-LH-SM GLC-SX-MM Single-mode, long-haul, up to 10 km Multi-
mode, up to 550 m
Front View
The following figure shows the front view of the fiber-optic single and multimode gigabit
transceivers.
Figure G-22: Front View of the Fiber-Optic Transceivers - Single and Multimode
The GLC-FE-100FX transceiver can be used with only the Cisco 2960-8TC-L switch. The
GLC-GE-100FX transceiver can be used with the Cisco 2960-24-TC-L and the 2960-48-TC-L.
Item Specification
Model Cisco Fiber-Optic Ethernet Transceivers (GLC-
FE-100FX and GLC-GE-100FX)
Type Multimode, up to 2 km
Front View
270
Control Network Specifications
Item Specification
Model Cisco Twisted Pair Copper Gigabit Transceiver
(GLC-T)
Type 1 twisted pair port, up to 100 m
Front View
The following figure shows the front view of the twisted pair gigabit transceiver.
271
Control Network Specifications
The DeltaV system supports the Single Port Fiber Switch and the Four Port Fiber Switch.
The Single Port Fiber Switch is an Ethernet switch with one 100BASE-FX port and four
10/100BASE-TX ports. The Four Port Fiber Switch is an Ethernet switch with four 100BASE-
FX ports and one 10/100BASE-TX port. The switches can be mounted on a DIN rail and
provide comprehensive LED diagnostics. The switches can be installed in Zone 2 and
provide connection to Zone 1 components over the certified energy-limited fiber port.
Primarily the switches are the fiber port connection to the Zone 1 components; however,
they can be used for all Control Network applications. Refer to the Installing Your DeltaV
Zone 1 Intrinsically Safe Hardware manual in Books Online for information on connecting to
the DeltaV Intrinsically Safe system.
Table G-15: Single Port and Four Port Fiber Switch Specifications
Item Specification
Input voltage 24 VDC 20%
Input current 0.25 A for the Single Port Fiber Switch
0.35 A for the Four Port Fiber Switch
Link budget Multimode 62.5/125 m - max attenuation
11 dB
Multimode 50/125 m - max attenuation 8
dB
Wavelength 1300 nm
272
Control Network Specifications
Table G-15: Single Port and Four Port Fiber Switch Specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Fiber interface 100 BASE-FX with MT-RJ receptacle, full duplex
only
Fiber type Refer to the "Setting up the DeltaV Control Net-
work" topic.
Nominal fiber distance 2 km
Twisted pair ports 10/100 BASE-T, RJ45 compatible
Cable type Category 5e screened twisted pair (ScTP)
Mounting Vertically on a horizontal DIN rail
The following figures show the top and bottom views of the Single Port Fiber Switch.
+
Not used
-
+
Shield
ground
-
10/100BaseTx ports
The following figures show the top and bottom views of the Four Port Fiber Switch.
273
Control Network Specifications
+
Shield
ground
-
+
Shield
ground
-
100BaseFx Power
ports inputs
10/100BaseTx port
Related information
274
Control Network Specifications
DeltaV Smart Switches are intended for plug and play use with a DeltaV system. No
configuration is necessary unless you want to access a switch with Telnet, monitor a switch
with a web-based switch interface from a Management station or use the DeltaV version
10.3 One-Click Lockdown application to lock the switches to prevent unauthorized devices
from being connected to unused ports on the switches. In DeltaV version 11.3 or higher,
Smart Switches are commissioned using the DeltaV Smart Switch Command Center
(SSCC). When you commission the switches using the SSCC, the switch is given a network
address and associated with a control module so that switch hardware conditions can be
interpreted as DeltaV alarms.
Monitoring a switch with the web-based switch interface requires Java software that can be
downloaded from the Internet. A serial interface cable is required to connect the switchs
serial port to the Management station in order to set up the switches. The serial interface
cable can be purchased separately from Emerson Process Management or you can build
the cable assembly. The following figure shows the pin outs for building the serial interface
cable assembly. Different pin outs are used for each end of the cable.
Media modules with fiber-optic network ports are fixed to 100Mbit full duplex
communication (except for ports that use SFP media modules that are fixed at either
100Mbit or 1 gigabit full duplex). When DeltaV Smart Switches are used in an existing
network, all existing fiber-optic connections must be set to 100Mbit full duplex for the
switches to communicate. For example, if DeltaV Smart Switches are installed in a network
with 3Com switches, you must change the 3Com switches from the default half duplex to
full duplex.
Refer to Books Online for DeltaV version 10.3 for information on the One-Click Lockdown
application, for information on configuring, monitoring, and accessing the switches with
Telnet, and for information on downloading Java software. Refer to Books Online for
DeltaV version 11.3 for information about the Smart Switch Command Center.
Before installing and using DeltaV Smart Switches and media modules, refer to the
important safety information in the System Administration and Maintenance manual in
Books Online.
The DeltaV MD Smart Switches consist of the base switches, MD20 and MD30, and DeltaV
media modules that plug into the base switches. The MD20 base Smart Switches have 8,
16, or 24, 10/100Mbit ports and the MD30 have 8, 16, or 24, 10/100Mbit ports and a
gigabit slot. For both base Smart Switch types, a variety of pluggable DeltaV media
modules provide the interfaces to the DeltaV Control Network in a variety of media types.
275
Control Network Specifications
Note
The MD20 and MD30 Smart Switches consist of the base switch and the backplane. These items are
not available separately. The base switch functions as the power supply and the backplane houses
the switching circuits.
Model Type
MD20-8 MD20-8-ES Up to 8, 10/100Mbit ethernet ports with addi-
tional modules
MD20-16 MD20-16-ES Up to 16, 10/100Mbit ethernet ports with addi-
tional modules
MD20-24 MD20-24-ES Up to 24, 10/100Mbit ethernet ports with addi-
tional modules
MD30-8 MD30-8-ES Up to 8, 10/100Mbit ethernet ports with addi-
tional modules 2, gigabit ports
MD30-16 MD30-16-ES Up to 16, 10/100Mbit ethernet ports with addi-
tional modules 2, gigabit ports
MD30-24 MD30-24-ES Up to 24, 10/100Mbit ethernet ports with addi-
tional modules 2, gigabit ports
The ES versions of the MD20 and MD30 Smart Switches have an extended temperature
range and conformal coating.
Table G-17: DeltaV Media Modules for the MD20 and MD30 Base Smart Switches
Model Type
MD4-2TX/SFP 2, gigabit multimode fiber SFP slots
MD4-2TX/SFP-ES 2, gigabit, RJ45 twisted pair ports
Note
Either the twisted pair port or the fiber SFP slots
can be used. Both cannot be used at the same
time.
276
Control Network Specifications
Table G-17: DeltaV Media Modules for the MD20 and MD30 Base Smart Switches
(continued)
Model Type
MD3-2FXM2/2TX1 2, 100BASE-FX fast ethernet over multi-
MD3-2FXM2/2TX1-ES mode fiber ports (SC connectors)
2, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX twisted pair ports
(RJ45 connectors)
MD3-2FXS2/2TX1 2, 100BASE-FX fast ethernet over single
MD3-2FXS2/2TX1-ES mode fiber ports (SC connectors)
2, 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX twisted pair ports
(RJ45 connectors)
MD3-4FXM2 4, 100BASE-FX fast ethernet over multimode fi-
MD3-4FXM2-ES ber ports (SC connectors)
Images
The following figure shows an MD20 8-port base Smart Switch. This switch has two
10/100Mbit slots for media modules. Various media modules are available with up to four
ports per module.
277
Control Network Specifications
P P1 | P2
LOCK RL1| RL2
L/D AN | TP
FDX 6|3
1000 5|2
RUN TEST | 1
SELECT
Network Switch
MD20-8
The following figure shows an MD20 16-port base Smart Switch. This switch has four
10/100Mbit slots for media modules. Various media modules are available with up to four
ports per module.
P P1 | P2
LOCK RL1| RL2
L/D AN | TP
FDX 6|3
1000 5|2
RUN TEST | 1
SELECT
Network Switch
MD20-16
Ground screw
278
Control Network Specifications
The MD20 16-port Smart Switch can be expanded to 24 ports in the field with a two slot
expansion backplane or the MD20 24-port Smart Switch can be purchased as a single
product.
P P1 | P2
LOCK RL1| RL2
L/D AN | TP
FDX 6|3
1000 5|2
RUN TEST | 1
SELECT
Network Switch
MD20-16
Ground screw
The following figure shows an MD20 16-port Smart Switch with four media modules
installed.
Figure G-33: MD20 16-Port Smart Switch with Four Media Modules
P P1 | P2 P P P P
LOCK RL1| RL2
L/D AN | TP 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
FDX 6|3 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 2 2 2
1000 5|2 3 3 3 3 3 3
RUN TEST | 1 4 4 4 4 4 4
SELECT
Network Switch Switch Interface Switch Interface Switch Interface Switch Interface
Module Module Module Module
279
Control Network Specifications
The MD30 Smart Switches have 8 or 16, 10/100Mbit ports and a gigabit slot to the left of
the base switch. The following figure shows an MD30 8-port Smart Switch.
P P1 | P2
LOCK RL1| RL2
L/D AN | TP
FDX 6|3
1000 5|2
RUN TEST | 1
SELECT
Network Switch
MD30-8
Ground screw
P P1 | P2
LOCK RL1| RL2
L/D AN | TP
FDX 6|3
1000 5|2
RUN TEST | 1
SELECT
Network Switch
MD30-16
Ground screw
280
Control Network Specifications
The following figure shows an MD30 16-port Smart Switch with five media modules. The
media module to the left of the base switch has two gigabit ports.
P P P1 | P2 P P P P
LOCK RL1| RL2
1 1 L/D AN | TP 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
2 2 FDX 6|3 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 2 2 2
1000 5|2 3 3 3 3 3 3
1 2
RUN TEST | 1 4 4 4 4 4 4
SELECT
Switch Interface Network Switch Switch Interface Switch Interface Switch Interface Switch Interface
Module Module Module Module Module
The MD30 16-port Smart Switch, like the MD20 16-port Smart Switch, can be expanded in
the field to 24 ports with a two slot expansion backplane or the MD30 24-port Smart
Switch can be purchased as a single product.
As shown in the following figure, an image on the front of the media module shows the
media modules port layout. This port layout is used by the MD3-4FXS2, MD3-4FXM4, and
MD3-4FXM2 media modules
281
Control Network Specifications
1 1
2 2 Port 1
3 3
4 4 Port 2
Port 3
4FXS2
Connector end
The following figure shows the port layout for the MD2-2FXM2 and 2FXS2 media modules.
Port 1
Port 2
Connector end
The following figure shows the port layout for the MD3-2FXM2/2TX1, 2FXM4/2TX1,
1FXS2/3TX1, and 2FXS2/2TX1 media modules.
282
Control Network Specifications
Figure G-39: Port Layout for the MD3-2FXM2/2TX1, 2FXM4/2TX1, 1FXS2/3TX1, and
2FXS2/2TX1
Bottom view
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Connector end
The following figure shows the port layout for the MD4-2TX/SFP media module.
Port 1
Port 2
Port 1
Port 2
Connector end
The following figure shows the port layout for the MD2-4TX1 media module.
283
Control Network Specifications
Port 1 Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Connector end
The following figure shows the port layout for the 4TX1-PoE media module.
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
D.C. 48v
Connector end
Related information
284
Control Network Specifications
The following table provides power specifications for the DeltaV MD20 and MD30 base
Smart Switches. The base switches provide power to the media modules.
Table G-18: Power Specifications for the DeltaV MD Base Smart Switches
Item Specification
Input voltage +18 to +32 VDC
Mounting Vertically on a horizontal DIN rail.
Images
Figure G-43: Bottom View of the MD20 and MD30 Smart Base Switch
Serial port
USB port
Dip switch
(not used) Power 1
1 = +24 VDC
1 2 3 4
Power 1 2 = 0 VDC
connectors 3,4 = Relay 1
Power 2 Power 2
connectors
4 3 2 1
1 = +24 VDC
2 = 0 VDC
3,4 = Relay 2
A detachable screw terminal block, shown in the preceding image, is used to supply
the required power to the MD base Smart Switches.
A ground screw on the left side of the MD switchs mounting chassis, shown in the
following figure, connects to an instrumentation ground to provide a shield ground
for the switch and device communication cables.
285
Control Network Specifications
P P1 | P2 P P P P
LOCK RL1| RL2
L/D AN | TP 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
FDX 6|3 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 2 2 2
1000 5|2 3 3 3 3 3 3
RUN TEST | 1 4 4 4 4 4 4
SELECT
Network Switch Switch Interface Switch Interface Switch Interface Switch Interface
Module Module Module Module
Ground screw
The DeltaV RM Smart Switches consist of four types of base switches and, depending upon
the switch type, up to two pluggable media modules. The media modules provide a variety
of pluggable media options. Table G-21 describes the media modules. The RM-100 Base
Smart Switch-RP supports redundant input power. The RM Smart Switches can be
mounted on a 19 inch rack or on a wall.
Model Type
RM100-Base Smart Switch 2, gigabit Ethernet combo ports
8, fast Ethernet ports
2 sockets for media modules for an addition-
al 8 or 16 ports
RM100-Base Smart Switch-RP 2, gigabit Ethernet combo ports
8, fast Ethernet ports
2 sockets for media modules for an addition-
al 8 or 16 ports
Redundant input power.
286
Control Network Specifications
Model Type
RM100-8TX 8, 10/100Mbit twisted pair ports with RJ45
connectors
2, 10/100/1000Mbit twisted pair ports with
RJ45 connectors
2, 100/1000Mbit SFP-based ports
This is a fixed-configuration switch; no addition-
al media modules can be added to it.
Note
Either the 10/100/1000Mbit twisted pair ports
or the SFP ports can be used. Both port types
cannot be used at the same time.
Note
Either the 10/100/1000Mbit twisted pair ports
or the SFP ports can be used. Both port types
cannot be used at the same time.
Table G-20: Number of Slots and Connectable Network Segments for the DeltaV
RM100 Smart Switches
(13) Up to two modules can be installed in any combination of fiber and twisted pair for the RM100 Base Smart Switch and Base Smart Switch-
RP.
(14) Up to 24 ports when all slots are filled.
287
Control Network Specifications
Table G-20: Number of Slots and Connectable Network Segments for the DeltaV
RM100 Smart Switches (continued)
Images
The following figure shows the RM base Smart Switch. In this image, the slots for the
media modules are empty.
FAULT USB
V.24
RUN
LOCK
P
2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8
1.2
100/1000Mbit
10/100/1000Mbit fiber SFP slots
twisted pair ports
In the following figure, two eight port media modules are installed in the RM100.
FAULT USB
V.24
RUN
LOCK
P
2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8
1.2
100/1000Mbit
10/100/1000Mbit fiber SFP slots
twisted pair ports
288
Control Network Specifications
The following table provides information on the media modules for the RM base Smart
Switches.
Model Type
RM100-EM-8TX 8, fast Ethernet twisted pair ports with RJ45 con-
nectors
RM100-EM-8MM-FX 8, fast Ethernet multimode fiber ports with DSC
connectors
RM100-EM-8SM-FX 8, fast Ethernet single mode fiber ports with
DSC connectors
RM100-EM-8SFP 8, fast Ethernet SFP slots
289
Control Network Specifications
The RM100-EM-8SM-FX media module has the same physical layout as the RM100-EM-8-
MM-FX shown in the following figure.
Fast Ethernet
slots
The following table provides power and other specifications for the DeltaV RM Smart
Switches.
Item Specification
Input voltage 100 - 240 VAC
290
Control Network Specifications
Item Specification
Input current 0.4 - 0.2 A
Mounting Horizontally on a 19 inch rack or vertically on
the wall
Rear View
The RM100 Base Smart Switch-RP supports redundant input power. The power supply
inputs are uncoupled. The following figure shows the redundant power connections on the
rear of the RM100 Base Smart Switch-RP.
The standard power supply alone supplies power to the device. The redundant power
supply automatically becomes active if the standard supply fails.
The DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches are all 8-port switches. Each of the FP20 Smart Switches
has 6, 10/100Mbit twisted pair ports, two of the eight ports on each switch are fiber uplink
ports, twisted pair uplink ports, or a combination of fiber and twisted pair uplink ports.
Model Type
FP20-6TX2TX 8, 10/100Mbit RJ45 twisted pair ports
FP20-6TX2TX-ES(15)
FP20-6TX1MM1TX 6, 10/100Mbit RJ45 twisted pair ports
FP20-6TX1MM1TX-ES 1, 100Mbit (DSC) multimode fiber uplink
port
1, 10/100Mbit RJ45 twisted pair uplink port
FP20-6TX1SM1TX 6, 10/100Mbit RJ45 twisted pair ports
FP20-6TX1SM1TX-ES 1, 100Mbit (DSC) single mode fiber uplink
port
1, 10/100Mbit RJ45 twisted pair uplink port
(15) The ES version of the switches have an extended temperature range and conformal coating. Refer to Appendix A for temperature ranges.
291
Control Network Specifications
Model Type
FP20-6TX1SMLH1TX 6, 10/100Mbit RJ45 twisted pair ports
FP20-6TX1SMLH1TX-ES 1, 100Mbit (DSC) single mode fiber, long
haul uplink port
1, 10/100Mbit RJ45 twisted pair uplink port
FP20-6TX2MM 6, 10/100Mbit RJ45 twisted pair ports
FP20-6TX2MM-ES 2, 100Mbit (DSC) multimode fiber uplink
ports
FP20-6TX2SM 6, 10/100Mbit RJ45 twisted pair ports
FP20-6TX2SM-ES 2, 100Mbit (DSC) single mode fiber uplink
ports
FP20-6TX2SMLH 6, 10/100Mbit RJ45 twisted pair ports
FP20-6TX2SMLH-ES 2, 100Mbit (DSC) single mode fiber, long
haul uplink ports
Front Views
The following figure shows the front view of the DeltaV FP20-6TX2TX Smart Switch. This
switch has eight twisted pair ports.
V.24 interface
V.24
1 2
3 4
8 twisted
pair ports
5 6
7 8
Ground
screw
The following figure shows the front view of the DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches with six
twisted pair ports, one twisted pair uplink port, and one fiber uplink port (model numbers
FP20-6TX1MM1TX, FP20-6TX1SM1TX, FP20-6TX1SMLH1TX)
292
Control Network Specifications
Figure G-52: Front View of the DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches with Fiber and Twisted
Pair Uplink Ports
Network Switch FAULT
V.24 interface
V.24
1 2
Twisted pair DA
uplink port 2
LS
Twisted pair
3 4
ports
Ground 5 6
screw
The following figure shows the front view of the DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches with six
twisted pair ports and two fiber uplink ports (model numbers FP20-6TX2MM,
FP20-6TX2SM, and FP20-6TX2SMLH).
Figure G-53: Front View of the DeltaV FP20 Smart Switches with Two Fiber Uplink
Ports
Network Switch FAULT
V.24 interface
V.24
LS DA
1 2
Fiber uplink
ports 2
Twisted pair
3 4
ports
Ground 5 6
screw
293
Control Network Specifications
Item Specification
Input voltage 9.6 - 60 VDC 18 - 30 VAC
Alarm contacts Normally closed. Changes to Open if: Power
supply fails At least one port has a defective link
status Internal voltage supply fails Self-test fail-
ure occurs
Mounting Vertically on a horizontal DIN rail. A rack mount
kit is available.
In addition to CommScope cable, several types of Belden cable can be used as long as it
meets or exceeds the CommScope 5ES4 category 5e performance and shielding
specifications. Belden cable can be purchased through Belden cable distributors. If Belden
cable is used, the basic cable installation and temperature specifications differ from the
specifications shown in the following list.
Follow these rules when installing CommScope cable to protect the electrical performance
of the cables:
294
Control Network Specifications
Item Specification
Type Refer to "Control Network Installation Require-
ments"
Minimum number of fibers Two per communications channel
Attenuation Refer to "Control Network Installation Require-
ments"
Temperature rating Refer to "Control Network Installation Require-
ments"
Connectors Refer to "Control Network Installation Require-
ments"
Related information
Item Specification
Connectors Category 5, 8-position RJ45 plug connectors(16)
Terminating tool Hand or automatic machine tool for 8-position
connectors(16)
Boots, color-coded Yellow = primary control network cable(16)
Black = secondary control network cable(16)
Vinyl plastic tape Yellow Black
Note
Color marking tape also can be used.
295
Control Network Specifications
Crossover cable with one end shielded (metal-enclosed RJ45 connector) and one
end isolated (plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector)
Crossover cable with both ends shielded (metal-enclosed RJ45 connectors)
Straight-through cable with one end shielded (metal-enclosed RJ45 connector) and
one end isolated (plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector)
Straight-through cable with both ends shielded (metal-enclosed RJ45 connectors)
Before building any of these assemblies, you will need to determine the correct
combination of shielded and unshielded RJ45 connectors for your DeltaV Control Network.
Refer to 10/100Mbit network examples to make this determination. These figures contain
notes that indicate where metal-enclosed and plastic-enclosed RJ45 connectors are
required and where straight-through and crossover cable are needed.
When building cable assemblies with shielded and unshielded connectors, always refer to
the connector and tool manufacturers latest assembly instructions and application
specifications. These specifications show the correct jacket and shield preparation length
for the specific connectors being used.
Figure G-54 shows an unshielded, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector. First the boot is slid
onto the cable, next the load bar is loaded with the eight inner cable conductors, then the
load bar/cable assembly is inserted into the connector housing and crimped. Finally, the
boot is slid over the assembly for additional strain relief.
Cable
conductors
Load bar/cable
assembly
Boot
Load bar
296
Control Network Specifications
Figure G-55 shows a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector. First the boot is slid onto the
cable, then the cable shield and drain wire are folded back, next the load bar is loaded with
the eight inner cable conductors, then the load bar/cable assembly is inserted into the
connector housing and crimped. Finally, the boot is slid over the assembly for additional
strain relief.
Cable
conductors
Load bar/cable
assembly
Drain wire
Shielding
Boot
Load bar
Related information
297
Control Network Specifications
298
Control Network Specifications
plant layout may require a large number of hubs in one wiring closet rather than single
hubs in several wiring closets or rack rooms located throughout the plant. Another plant
layout may require a centralized hub or switch in a star topology that branches to several
remote locations. These and other network configurations are possible and fully supported
by Emerson Process Management. Consult your sales representative for assistance with
network configuration.
The examples begin with simple 10 megabit per second (abbreviated here as 10Mbit)
twisted pair network implementations, and end with more complex 10/100Mbit twisted
pair networks with a combination of fiber-optic and twisted pair segments. In all cases, the
examples show the maximum cable distances and the maximum number of intermediate
Ethernet hubs. These maximum limits assure you that any network design that exactly
matches the example, or is a subset of the example, is guaranteed to operate according to
Ethernet rules and will provide the necessary performance for your DeltaV system.
Hop Rules
Advanced Ethernet models used for the calculation of maximum packet transmission
distances over copper cabling can be found in Ethernet 802.3 standards. For simplicity, this
Appendix uses general Ethernet rules. For example, the number of repeater hops is limited
to four (four repeater hubs physically connected together in series) for 10Mbit networks,
and to two (two repeater hubs physically connected together in series) for 100Mbit
networks. This limitation on the number of repeater hops allows for a minimum amount of
space (Inter Frame Gap) between each packet that is transmitted over the network so that
the physical mediums receivers and transmitters located on each repeater port have time
to distinguish between the end of one packet and the beginning of the next. As a packet
travels between end nodes on a network, each repeater through which the packet travels
reduces the Inter Frame Gap by a small amount. If too many repeater hubs are in the path
between two end nodes, the overall net Inter Frame Gap shrinkage will result in an Inter
Frame Gap that is too small and packet information will be corrupted by the time it reaches
the receiving device. When all repeater hubs used in a network, such as the repeater hubs
that are qualified for use with the DeltaV system, are designed in compliance with Ethernet
standards, the generalized two hop/ four hop rules can be used. Otherwise, a custom
calculation would have to be performed on a case by case basis for every network
connection.
Consider the following guidelines when choosing between a media converter and switches
with small form factors:
With Ethernet media converters, the entire link must operate at the same speed and
duplex or severe communication problems can occur. This means that both fiber-
optic and twisted pair devices must operate at the same speed and duplex. For
example, the twisted pair link cannot operate at 100Mbit while the fiber-optic link
299
Control Network Specifications
operates at 10Mbit. The lower speed of the two attached devices determines the
maximum speed for the link. Likewise, the twisted pair port of the media converter
cannot operate at half duplex while its fiber-optic port operates at full duplex. For
100Mbit half duplex operation between a half duplex MD controller and a half
duplex fiber-optic media converter attached to a switchs fiber-optic port, fiber-
optic distance is limited to less than 300 meters because the entire link is half
duplex. The actual fiber cable distance must be calculated on a case-by-case basis
depending upon the manufacturers specifications for propagation delay through
the media converter.
With Ethernet switches with small form factors such as the DeltaV Single Port Fiber
Switch and DeltaV Four Port Fiber switch, the twisted pair port on the switch
operates with independent collision domain timing from all other ports including
the fiber-optic ports. This ensures that the fiber-optic distance can always be two
kilometers and the twisted pair distance can always be 100 meters. Due to advances
in switch technology and new components, the cost of a multi-port small form
factor switch is about the same as a two port media converter. In addition, more
devices can be added to this small switch as the system grows.
8 port non-stackable
table top or wall mount
external wall plug power supply
no upgrade options for Fiber-Optic Transceivers
Note
Make a ground connection to the mini-hub chassis with a 12 AWG wire for the twisted pair cable
shield ground.
In the following figure any port on any hub can be used for DeltaV Workstation, Controller,
and Application Station connections. However, port 8 on each hub is a special port used for
the hub to hub connections. The hub to hub connection through these special ports allows
the use of a standard straight-through twisted pair cable. A push button next to these
ports is for the crossover function. When the crossover function is not used, the port can
be used for regular workstation and controller connections.
300
Control Network Specifications
2 2 2 2
Workstation Workstation
A 3Com 8-port B
10 Mbit Office
connect hub
3 1 1 1 3
Callout Description
1 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link can be placed on either hub.
2 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .
3 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and hub but not on the PC.
Related information
301
Control Network Specifications
Figure G-59: Fiber-Optic and Twisted Pair Network Star with Cisco 3550 Switch
8 7 7
8
6 Cisco 2950C
twisted pair switch
with 2 MTRJ ports
4,6 6
1,3 2
4,6
1,3 Cisco 2950
6 twisted pair switch
7 2
8 6 7
8
Management ProPLUS
station station
7 7 7
6
2
8 7
5,6
6 8 7
Operator stations
6
1,3 2
1,3 2
6 4,6
7 6 7 4,6
8 8
302
Control Network Specifications
Figure G-60: Fiber-Optic and Twisted Pair Network Using the Single Port Fiber Switch
10
Port 3
Power
Error
Port 1 Port 4
7
Port 2 Port 5 8
10
2 Power
Error
Port 3
Port 1 Port 4
7 Port 2 Port 5
8 7
Management ProPLUS
station station
10
2
9 Port 3
Power
Error
7 7 7 Port 1 Port 4
Port 2 Port 5
6
2
8
1,3 4,6 Cisco 3550FX
fiber optic switch
6
7 7 10
Port 3
Power
Error
7
Port 2 Port 5 8
Operator stations
10 10
2
Port 3
Power
Error
Port 3
Power
Port 1 Port 4 Error
7 Port 2 Port 5
Port 1 Port 4
7 Port 2 Port 5
8 7
8 7
Callout Description
1 100 m (max) crossover cable. Cat. 5e Screened Twisted Pair crossover cable (trans-
mit and receive) is required between switches.
3 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.
303
Control Network Specifications
Callout Description
4 The two MTRJ ports on this switch are set by Cisco to 100BASE-FX full duplex opera-
tion. Neither the speed nor duplex can be changed. Ensure that any devices attach-
ed to these ports are properly configured for 100BASE-FX full duplex operation be-
fore making the connection.
6 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for both fi-
ber-optic and twisted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to Managing Cisco Switches in
Books Online for information. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web manage-
ment information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.
Use an IP address from the address range allowed for switches for this PC.
7 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.
8 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .
9 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the information on the management station in the related topics before connecting
the station to the DeltaV Control Network.
10 The cable shields connected to the Single Port Fiber Switch must be grounded. To
ground the shields, connect the shield GND to ground or use a twisted pair cable
with both shield ends connected and installed in a grounded port.
Related information
304
Control Network Specifications
Figure G-61: Twisted Pair Network Star Using Cisco 2950 Twisted Pair Switches
4 4
3 3
5 5
1,2 All Cisco 2950 1,2
twisted pair switches
5 5
1,2
4 3 4 3
1,2
Management
station ProPLUS stations
6 4
1,2 3
3 5
4 3 3
1,2
5
5
1,2
5 5
4 3
4 3 3
1,2
4 3 4
3 5
5
1,2 1,2
5 5
4 3 4 3
Callout Description
1 100 m (max) crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair crossover cable (trans-
mit and receive) is required between switches.
2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.
305
Control Network Specifications
Callout Description
3 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.
4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .
5 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the twis-
ted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books Online
for information. Refer to for the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for
switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web manage-
ment information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.
6 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information on the management station before connecting
the station to the DeltaV Control Network.
Related information
306
Control Network Specifications
Figure G-62: Twisted Pair Cascaded Network Using Cisco 2950 Twisted Pair Switches
4
3
All Cisco 2950 5
twisted pair switches
1,2
4
3 5
ProPLUS stations
1,2
4 3 3
5
3
Management 1,2
6
station
5
4 3 3 1,2
Operator stations
5
4 3
1,2
4 3
Callout Description
1 100 m (max) crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair crossover cable (trans-
mit and receive) is required between switches.
2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.
3 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.
307
Control Network Specifications
Callout Description
4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .
5 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the twis-
ted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to Managing Cisco Switches in Books Online for
information. for the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for switches on
DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web management informa-
tion. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.
6 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information on the management station before connecting
the station to the DeltaV Control Network.
Related information
308
Control Network Specifications
Figure G-63: Twisted Pair Cascaded Networks with Fiber Links Using the Cisco 2950C
4
5
All Cisco 2950C 1,2
twisted pair switches
with 2 MTRJ fiber optic ports 3
4
5
1,2
ProPLUS stations 3
4 5 5
1,2
6 3
Management
station
1,2
4 5 5
3
4 5
3
1,2
4 5
Callout Description
1 The two MTRJ ports on this switch are set by Cisco to 100BASE-FX full duplex opera-
tion. Neither the speed nor duplex can be changed. Ensure that any devices attach-
ed to these ports are properly configured for 100BASE-FX full duplex operation be-
fore making the connection.
2 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for both fi-
ber-optic and twisted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches"
in Books Online for information. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web manage-
ment information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.
Use an IP address from the address range allowed for switches for this PC .
309
Control Network Specifications
Callout Description
4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .
5 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.
6 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information on the management station before connecting
the station to the DeltaV Control Network.
Related information
310
Control Network Specifications
Figure G-64: 100Mbit Twisted Pair Cascaded Network with Cisco 3750 Switches
Operator stations Operator stations
Switch 1 7 5 8 Switch 4 7 5 8
3 Controllers 3 Controllers
Catalyst 3750
Switch 5 7 5 8
Switch 2 7 5 8 3 Controllers
3
Controllers
1,2 1,2
Switch 3 7 5 8 Switch 6 7 5 8
3 Controllers 3 Controllers
Callout Description
1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair
cable is required between switches.
2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.
3 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.
311
Control Network Specifications
Callout Description
4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.
5 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the twis-
ted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books Online
for information. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web management informa-
tion. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.
6 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information on the management station before connecting
the station to the DeltaV Control Network.
7 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate du-
plex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or du-
plex mismatches, which create communications failures, will occur. Always allow
the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex.
8 The switch is equipped with two gigabit slots that require a fiber-optic or twisted
pair small form factor pluggable (SFP) module (not used in the preceding network
drawing ). These slots always operate at 1000Mbit (gigabit) full duplex when fitted
with the SFP module.
Related information
312
Control Network Specifications
Figure G-65: Gigabit Twisted Pair Network Cascade with Cisco 3750 Switches
Catalyst 3750
Catalyst 3750
7 5 8
3 3 7
Cisco Cisco
Controllers Gigabit Controllers Gigabit
8 Twisted Pair Twisted Pair
SFP Module SFP Modules
Catalyst 3750
3 7 Cisco Cisco 8
3 7
Controllers Gigabit Controllers Gigabit
Twisted Pair Twisted Pair
SFP Modules SFP Modules
8
1,2
Operator stations Operator stations
1,2
4 Cisco Catalyst 4 Cisco Catalyst
Switch 3 Switch 6 5
3750-24TS 5 3750-24TS
Catalyst 3750 Catalyst 3750
8
3 7 Cisco 3 7 Cisco
Controllers Gigabit Controllers Gigabit
Twisted Pair Twisted Pair
8 SFP Modules SFP Module
1,2
Callout Description
1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair
cable is required between switches.
2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.
313
Control Network Specifications
Callout Description
3 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .
4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.
5 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the twis-
ted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books Online
for information. Refer to the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for
switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web manage-
ment information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.
6 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information on the management station before connecting
the station to the DeltaV Control Network.
7 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate du-
plex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or du-
plex mismatches, which create communications failures, will occur. Always allow
the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex.
8 The switch is equipped with two gigabit slots that require a fiber-optic or twisted
pair small form factor pluggable (SFP) module. The twisted pair gigabit module is
shown in the preceding figure. These slots always operate at 1000Mbit (gigabit) full
duplex when fitted with the SFP module.
314
Control Network Specifications
Figure G-66: Gigabit Fiber-Optic Network Cascade with Cisco 3750 Switches
6 Cisco
4 4 6
Gigabit Cisco
Controllers Controllers
Fiber Optic Gigabit
2 SFP Module Fiber Optic
2
Management SFP Modules
Operator ProPLUS station
stations station 8
Catalyst 3750
4 6 Cisco Cisco
4 6
Controllers Gigabit Controllers Gigabit
Fiber Optic Fiber Optic
2 3 SFP Modules 2 3 SFP Modules
4 6 Cisco 4 6 Cisco
Controllers Gigabit Controllers Gigabit
Fiber Optic Fiber Optic
3 SFP Modules 2 3
2 SFP Module
Callout Description
1 The SFP slots can be fitted with any combination of the SX or LH fiber-optic trans-
ceiver modules. The SX module supports up to 550 meters of Multimode Fiber and
the LH module supports up to 10 kilometers of Single Mode Fiber. Fiber-optic spli-
ces, patch panels, and connector losses reduce these overall distances. The SFP slots
and transceivers operate at 1000Mb (gigabit) full duplex only.
2 Each SFP transceiver module has a transmit port and a receive port. An LC type du-
plex fiber-optic connector is required on the end of the fiber-optic cable pair. The
fiber-optic switch-to-switch connection is a crossover where the transmit on one
end is connected to the receive on the other end.
3 For Multimode Fiber on the SX type module, a 62.5/125 micron or 50/125 micron
fiber can be used. For Single Mode fiber on the LH module, a 9 micron fiber can be
used.
315
Control Network Specifications
Callout Description
4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .
5 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.
6 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate du-
plex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or du-
plex mismatches, which create communications failures, will occur. Always allow
the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex
7 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the twis-
ted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books Online
for information. Refer to the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for
switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web manage-
ment information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.
8 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information on the management station before connecting
the station to the DeltaV Control Network.
Related information
316
Control Network Specifications
Figure G-67: Gigabit Fiber-Optic Network Star with Cisco 3750 Switches
Central Area of Network Star
Operator ProPLUS Management Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS 1,7
stations station station 8 Catalyst 3750
Stacking
cable (rear)
1,7 Switch 5 4 6
5 5 5 Cisco
Catalyst 3750
2 Gigabit
Fiber Optic
Controllers SFP Module
Switch 2 6 Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS
Operator
Cisco Catalyst 3750G-12S 9 3
stations
Catalyst 3750
Gigabit
Fiber Optic
2 Switch 6 6 5 4
SFP Modules
Cisco
3 Gigabit
Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS 1,7 Fiber Optic
Controllers SFP Modules
2
Catalyst 3750
Operator stations
Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS 1,7
Switch 3 5 4 6
Cisco Catalyst 3750
Gigabit
Fiber Optic 3 Switch 7
Controllers 2 5 4 6
Operator stations SFP Module
Cisco
Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS 1,7 2 Gigabit
Fiber Optic
Catalyst 3750 Controllers SFP Module
Operator stations
Callout Description
1 The SFP slots can be fitted with any combination of the SX or LH fiber-optic trans-
ceiver modules. The SX module supports up to 550 meters of Multimode Fiber and
the LH module supports up to 10 kilometers of Single Mode Fiber. Fiber-optic spli-
ces, patch panels, and connector losses reduce these overall distances. The SFP slots
and transceivers operate at 1000Mb (gigabit) full duplex only.
2 Each SFP transceiver module has a transmit port and a receive port. An LC type du-
plex fiber-optic connector is required on the end of the fiber-optic cable pair. The
fiber-optic switch-to-switch connection is a crossover where the transmit on one
end is connected to the receive on the other end.
317
Control Network Specifications
Callout Description
3 For Multimode Fiber on the SX type module, a 62.5/125 micron or 50/125 micron
fiber can be used. For Single Mode fiber on the LH module, a 9 micron fiber can be
used.
4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.
5 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.
6 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate du-
plex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or du-
plex mismatches, which create communications failures, will occur. Always allow
the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex
7 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the twis-
ted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books Online
for information. Refer to the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for
switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web manage-
ment information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.
8 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information on the management station before connecting
the station to the DeltaV Control Network.
9 A Cisco stacking cable is included with the switch and can be used to connect two
3750-series switches together to form a single switch that can be managed with
one IP address.
Related information
318
Control Network Specifications
Figure G-68: 100Mb Fiber-Optic Star with Cisco 2950C and 3750 Switches
Central Area of Network Star
Cisco Catalyst 2950C-24 3 8
Operator ProPLUS Management
stations station station 9
Stacking
cable (rear)
10 Switch 5 5 7
6 6 6
Catalyst 3750
4
Controllers
Switch 2 7 Cisco Catalyst 3750-24TS 1 8 Operator
Cisco Catalyst 3750-24FS stations
Catalyst 3750
Switch 1 2 1 8
Switch 6 5 7
3 8 6
Cisco Catalyst 2950C-24
4
Controllers
Switch 3 6 5 7 Operator stations
Cisco Catalyst 2950C-24 3 8
4
Controllers
Operator stations
3 8 Switch 7 6 5 7
Cisco Catalyst 2950C-24
Switch 4 Controllers
6 5 7 Operator stations
Callout Description
1 The SFP slots (not used in the preceding image ) can be fitted with any combination
of the SX or LH fiber-optic transceiver modules. The SX module supports up to 550
meters of Multimode Fiber and the LH module supports up to 10 kilometers of Sin-
gle Mode Fiber. Fiber-optic splices, patch panels, and connector losses reduce these
overall distances. The SFP slots and transceivers operate at 1000Mb (gigabit) full du-
plex only.
319
Control Network Specifications
Callout Description
2 All MTRJ fiber-optic ports on this switch have been preconfigured by Emerson Proc-
ess Management to 100BASE-FX full duplex operation in order to meet the most
typical network configuration requirements. It is good practice to check each port's
duplex setting before connecting to them since it is also possible to configure each
of these ports to half duplex operation. Half duplex operation is not recommended
for switch-to-switch connections. Check both ends of the link and ensure that they
are both configured to full duplex operation or a duplex mismatch, which can cause
serious communications problems, could occur.
3 The two MTRJ ports on this switch are set by Cisco to 100BASE-FX full duplex opera-
tion. Neither the speed nor duplex can be changed. Ensure that all devices attached
to these ports are properly configured for 100BASE-FX full duplex operation before
making the connection.
5 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .
6 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.
7 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate du-
plex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or du-
plex mismatches, which create communications failures, will occur. Always allow
the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex.
8 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the
switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books Online for infor-
mation. Refer to the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for switches on
DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web management informa-
tion. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.
9 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information on the management station before connecting
the station to the DeltaV Control Network.
10 A Cisco stacking cable is included with the switch and can be used to connect two
3750-series switches together to form a single switch that can be managed with
one IP address.
Related information
320
Control Network Specifications
Figure G-69: 100Mbit Twisted Pair Cascaded Network with Cisco 2960 Switches
Operator station Operator station Operator station
4 4
Cisco Catalyst Cisco Catalyst
2960-24TT-L Switch 2960-24TT-L Switch
7 7
3 3
Controllers Controllers
Switch
ProPlus station management station Operator station
5,6
4 4
Cisco Catalyst Cisco Catalyst
2960-48TT-L Switch 2960-24TT-L Switch
7 7
3 3
1,2 1,2
Controllers Controllers
Operator station
Operator station
4
Cisco Catalyst
2960-24TT-L Switch 4 Cisco Catalyst
2960-8TC-L Switch
7 3
3 7 8
Controllers Controllers
Callout Description
1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair
cable is required between switches.
2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.
321
Control Network Specifications
Callout Description
3 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .
4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.
5 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the twis-
ted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books Online
for information. Refer to the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for
switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web manage-
ment information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.
6 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information before connecting the station to the DeltaV Con-
trol Network.
7 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate du-
plex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or du-
plex mismatches, which create communications failures, could occur. Always allow
the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex.
8 The Cisco 2960-8TC-L is equipped with one gigabit port either as a RJ45 or a SFP
slot. The SFP slot requires a fiber-optic or twisted pair small form factor pluggable
(SFP) module. This slot operates at 1000Mbit (gigabit) full duplex when fitted with
the gigabit SFP module. If fitted with a 100BASE-FX SFP module (GLC-FE-100FX) it
operates at 100Mbit. This port is not used in this example.
Related information
322
Control Network Specifications
Figure G-70: Gigabit Twisted Pair Cascaded Network with Cisco 2960 Switches
Operator station Operator station Operator station
4 4
Cisco Catalyst Cisco Catalyst
2960-24TT-L Switch 2960-24TT-L Switch
7 7
3 3
Controllers Controllers
Switch
ProPlus station management station Operator station
5,6
4 4
Cisco Catalyst Cisco Catalyst
2960-48TT-L Switch 2960-24TT-L Switch
7 7
3 3
1,2 1,2
Controllers Controllers
Operator station
Operator station
4
Cisco Catalyst
2960-24TT-L Switch 4 Cisco Catalyst
2960-8TC-L Switch
7 3
3 7 8
Controllers Controllers
Callout Description
1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair
cable is required between switches.
2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.
323
Control Network Specifications
Callout Description
3 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .
4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.
5 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the twis-
ted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books Online
for information. Refer to the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for
switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web manage-
ment information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.
6 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the information in the related topics before connecting the station to the DeltaV
Control Network. before
7 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate du-
plex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or du-
plex mismatches, which create communications failures, could occur. Always allow
the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex.
8 The Cisco 2960-8TC-L is equipped with one gigabit port either as a RJ45 or a SFP
slot. The SFP slot requires a fiber-optic or twisted pair small form factor pluggable
(SFP) module. This slot operates at 1000Mbit (gigabit) full duplex when fitted with
the gigabit SFP module. If fitted with a 100BASE-FX SFP module (GLC-FE-100FX) it
operates at 100Mbit. This port is not used in this example.
Related information
324
Control Network Specifications
Figure G-71: Gigabit Fiber-Optic Cascaded Network with Cisco 2960 Switches
Operator station Operator station Operator station
5 5
Cisco Catalyst Cisco Catalyst
6 6
2960-24TC-L Switch 2960-24TC-L Switch
4 4
Switch
ProPlus station management station Operator station
7,8
5 5
Cisco Catalyst 6 Cisco Catalyst
6
2960-48TC-L Switch 2960-24TC-L Switch
4 4
1,2,9 1,2,9
Controllers Controllers
2,3 2,3
Operator station
Operator station
5
6 Cisco Catalyst
2960-24TC-L Switch 5 Cisco Catalyst
2960-8TC-L Switch
1,2,10
4 6
4 Cisco
GLC-FE-100FX
SFP Module
1,2,9
Controllers Controllers
Callout Description
1 The SFP slots can be fitted with any combination of the SX or LH fiber-optic trans-
ceiver modules. The SX module supports up to 550 meters of Multimode Fiber and
the LH module supports up to 10 kilometers of Single Mode Fiber. Fiber-optic spli-
ces, patch panels, and connector losses reduce these overall distances. The SFP slots
and transceivers operate at 1000Mb (gigabit) full duplex only.
2 Each SFP transceiver has a transmit port and a receive port. An LC type duplex fiber-
optic connector is required on the end of the fiber-optic cable pair. The fiber-optic
switch-to-switch connector is a crossover cable where the transmit on one end is
connected to the receive on the other end.
325
Control Network Specifications
Callout Description
3 For Multimode Fiber on the SX type module, 62.5/125 micron or 50/125 micron
fiber can be used. For Single Mode fiber on the LH module, a 9/125 micron fiber can
be used.
4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .
5 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.
6 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate du-
plex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or du-
plex mismatches, which create communications failures, could occur. Always allow
the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex.
7 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the twis-
ted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books Online
for information. Refer to the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for
switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web manage-
ment information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.
8 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information before connecting the station to the DeltaV Con-
trol Network. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web management information.
A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.
10 Optionally, the fiber-optic link can be 100Mbit with a GLC-FE-100FX 100BASE-FX SFP
module in the Cisco 2960-8TC-L switch.
326
Control Network Specifications
Figure G-72: Gigabit Fiber-Optic Network Star with Cisco 2960 Switches
1,2,9
Controllers 6 Controllers 6
4 4
1,2,9
1,2,9,10 1,2,9,10
Operator station
Operator station
2,3
5 Cisco Catalyst
2960-48TC-L Switch Cisco Catalyst
5 2960-8TC-L Switch
4
1,2,9
Callout Description
1 The SFP slots can be fitted with any combination of the SX or LH fiber-optic trans-
ceiver modules. The SX module supports up to 550 meters of Multimode Fiber and
the LH module supports up to 10 kilometers of Single Mode Fiber. Fiber-optic spli-
ces, patch panels, and connector losses reduce these overall distances. The SFP slots
and transceivers operate at 1000Mb (gigabit) full duplex only.
2 Each SFP transceiver has a transmit port and a receive port. An LC type duplex fiber-
optic connector is required on the end of the fiber-optic cable pair. The fiber-optic
switch-to-switch connector is a crossover cable where the transmit on one end is
connected to the receive on the other end.
327
Control Network Specifications
Callout Description
3 For Multimode Fiber on the SX type module, 62.5/125 micron or 50/125 micron
fiber can be used. For Single Mode fiber on the LH module, a 9/125 micron fiber can
be used.
4 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .
5 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.
6 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate du-
plex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or du-
plex mismatches, which create communications failures, could occur. Always allow
the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex.
7 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the twis-
ted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books Online
for information. Refer to the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for
switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web manage-
ment information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.
8 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information before connecting the station to the DeltaV Con-
trol Network. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web management information.
A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.
11 A Cisco stacking cable is included with the switch and can be used to connect two
3750-series switches together to form a single switch that can be managed with
one IP address.
Related information
328
Control Network Specifications
Figure G-73: 100Mbit Fiber-Optic Network Star with Cisco 2950 and 2960 Switches
Operator station
Cisco Catalyst
2
2950C Switch
1
3
Switch
Controllers
ProPLUS Application Management
station station station
4,5
2 Cisco Catalyst
2960-48TC-L Switch 100BASE FX
Fiber
2 Cisco
Operator station GLC-GE-100FX
SFP Modules
2 Cisco Catalyst
2950C Switch
100BASE FX
Fiber
NOTE:
7 Only the GLC-GE-100 FX
1 100BASE FX SFP module can be
used in the Cisco 2960-48TC-L switch.
Controllers
Callout Description
1 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .
2 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on either switch and not on the PC.
329
Control Network Specifications
Callout Description
3 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate du-
plex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or du-
plex mismatches, which create communications failures, will occur. Always allow
the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex.
4 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the twis-
ted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books Online
for information. Refer to the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for
switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web manage-
ment information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.
5 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for inforamtion before connecting the station to the DeltaV Con-
trol Network. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web management. A dedicated
non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.
6 For a 100Mbit fiber-optic link, use only a GLC-GE-100FX 100BASE-FX SFP module in
the Cisco 2960-48TC-L switch.
7 The 100BASE-FX fiber-optic link has duplex LC connectors at the GLC-GE-100FX SFP
and RTMJ connectors at the Cisco 2950C switch.
Related information
330
Control Network Specifications
Figure G-74: 100Mbit Multimode Fiber-Optic Network with Cisco 2950 and 2960
Switches
Operator station Operator station
2
2 Cisco Catalyst
3
Cisco Catalyst 3 2960-8TC-L Switch
2960-24TC-L Switch
1
Cisco
6 GLC-FE-100FX
Cisco SFP Module
GLC-GE-100FX
1 SFP Module 7
Controllers
Controllers
NOTE:
NOTE: Only the GLC-FE-100 FX
Only the GLC-GE-100 FX 8 100BASE FX SFP module can be
100BASE FX SFP module can be used in the Cisco 2960-8TC-L switch.
used in the Cisco 2960-24TC-L switch.
Switch
Operator ProPlus management
station station station
100BASE FX
4,5 Fiber
2
Cisco Catalyst
3 2950C Switch
Controllers
Callout Description
1 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's DC ground.
Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground is made
at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable assembly
with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends .
2 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated,
plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of this
cable assembly/link must be placed on either switch and not on the PC.
331
Control Network Specifications
Callout Description
3 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate du-
plex. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair switch ports or du-
plex mismatches, which create communications failures, could occur. Always allow
the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex.
4 If switch management is to be used over the network via telnet or a web browser, be
aware that access privileges and port configuration requirements exist for the twis-
ted pair switch-to-switch links. Refer to "Managing Cisco Switches" in Books Online
for information. Refer to the list of reserved IP addresses that are allowed for
switches on DeltaV systems. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web manage-
ment information. A dedicated non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.
5 The Management station has special hardware and software requirements. Refer to
the related topics for information before connecting the station to the DeltaV Con-
trol Network. Refer to the Cisco documentation for web management. A dedicated
non-DeltaV PC is required for switch management.
6 For a 100Mbit fiber-optic link, use only a GLC-GE-100FX 100BASE-FX SFP module in
the Cisco 2960-24TC-L switch.
7 For a 100Mbit fiber-optic link, use only a GLC-FE-100FX 100BASE-FX SFP module in
the Cisco 2960-8TC-L switch.
8 The 100BASE-FX fiber-optic link has duplex LC connectors on all SFP modules and
MTRJ connectors on the Cisco 2950C switch.
Related information
332
Control Network Specifications
Figure G-75: DeltaV RM100 and FP20 Switches in Twisted Pair Network with Twisted
Pair Uplink
DeltaV Operator Stations and ProPlus
DeltaV Redundant Controllers
4,12
To additional 3,12
To additional
RM100 switch RM100 switch
1,2,9
1,2,9
RM100 RM100
Primary Secondary
7 8 7 8
3,12
11
FP20-6TX2TX
10 11 10
Primary Secondary
DeltaV
3,12 Redundant 3,12
Controllers
with Redundant
Network
Callout Description
1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair
cable is required between switches.
2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.
3 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45
connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's
DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of
ground is made at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this
cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.
333
Control Network Specifications
Callout Description
5 Use a ring tongue terminal to connect the ground screw of the switch to a suitable
shield ground. This connection provides a ground for the twisted pair Ethernet shiel-
ded connectors.
6 The type of uplink ports on this switch are determined by the switch part number. In
this example, all FP20 switches have 8 10/100Mbit/sec twisted pair ports and any
number of them can be used for uplinks to other switches. Other uplink port types
are available in fixed hardware configurations. SFP ports are not available on this
switch and this switch has no gigabit capable ports.
7 This switch has two fixed 10/100/1000Mbit/sec uplink ports and two SFP uplink
ports. The SFP ports can be fitted with optional fiber-optic SFP transceivers for long
distance communications. Only two uplinks can be active at a time in any combina-
tion of twisted pair and SFP. Refer to the ordering information for the available SFP
transceivers.
8 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed, auto-negotiate duplex,
and auto-detect polarity. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair
switch ports or duplex mismatches, which create communications failures, could
occur. Always allow the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex. All
unused ports of the switch can be deactivated (locked down) by a software com-
mand from the DeltaV station after all initial connections are made to the switch. If
additional controllers or workstations need to be connected to unused ports after
the initial lock down, an additional software command from the DeltaV station is re-
quired to unlock the ports. After the final connections are made, the lock down
command should be reissued to the switch to lock down any remaining unused
ports. Once the ports are in a lock down state, only the original device can commu-
nicate on its original port.
9 If more than one RM100 switch is required to increase port count in an area, use any
of the gigabit uplink ports for the switch-to-switch connection to provide ample
performance headroom on these aggregating links. 100Mbit/sec links can also be
used for this purpose but normally these links are reserved for single devices on the
edge of the network such as controllers and workstations that require much less
bandwidth than switch-to-switch links.
10 The serial port is not required for process communications; it is used only for occa-
sional out-of-band switch setup and management.
11 This connector is used for a +24VDC power supply input and relay contacts.
Related information
334
Control Network Specifications
Figure G-76: DeltaV RM100 and FP20 Twisted Pair Network with SFP and Fiber-Optic
Uplinks
DeltaV Operator Stations and ProPlus
DeltaV Redundant Controllers
4,13
To additional
RM100 switch 3,13
1 3 5 7
RM100-EM-8TX Network Switch RM100
1 3 5
RM100-EM-8MM-FX
7 RM100
Primary Secondary
FAULT USB
V.24
RUN
LOCK
P
2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
1.2
8 7 8
7
1,2,13 14 1,2,13 14
To additional To additional
FP20 switch FP20 switch
6 6 3,13
11
FP20 FP20
11
10 10
Primary Secondary
To additional To additional
FP20 switch FP20 switch
8 Shield 5 8
Shield 5
Ground Ground
DeltaV
3,13
Redundant 3,13
Controllers
with Redundant
Network
Callout Description
1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair
cable is required between switches.
2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.
335
Control Network Specifications
Callout Description
3 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45
connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's
DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of
ground is made at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this
cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.
5 Use a ring tongue terminal to connect the ground screw of the switch to a suitable
shield ground. This connection provides a ground for the twisted pair Ethernet shiel-
ded connectors.
6 The type of uplink ports on this switch are determined by the switch part number. In
this example, all FP20 switches have two 100Mbit/sec full duplex multimode fiber-
optic uplink ports. Other uplink port types are available in fixed hardware configura-
tions. SFP ports are not available on this switch and this switch has no gigabit capa-
ble ports.
7 This switch has two fixed 10/100/1000Mbit/sec uplink ports and two SFP uplink
ports. The SFP ports can be fitted with optional fiber-optic SFP transceivers for long
distance communications. Only two uplinks can be active at a time in any combina-
tion of twisted pair and SFP. Refer to the ordering information for the available SFP
transceivers.
8 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed, auto-negotiate duplex,
and auto-detect polarity. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair
switch ports or duplex mismatches, which create communications failures, could
occur. Always allow the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex. All
unused ports of the switch can be deactivated (locked down) by a software com-
mand from the DeltaV station after all initial connections are made to the switch. If
additional controllers or workstations need to be connected to unused ports after
the initial lock down, an additional software command from the DeltaV station is re-
quired to unlock the ports. After the final connections are made, the lock down
command should be reissued to the switch to lock down any remaining unused
ports. Once the ports are in a lock down state, only the original device can commu-
nicate on its original port.
9 If more than one RM100 switch is required to increase port count in an area, use any
of the gigabit uplink ports for the switch-to-switch connection to provide ample
performance headroom on these aggregating links. 100Mbit/sec links can also be
used for this purpose but normally these links are reserved for single devices on the
edge of the network such as controllers and workstations that require much less
bandwidth than switch-to-switch links.
10 The serial port is not required for process communications; it is used only for occa-
sional out-of-band switch setup and management.
11 This connector is used for a +24VDC power supply input and relay contacts.
336
Control Network Specifications
Callout Description
12 In this example, an SFP transceiver is used for the connection to the next switch. The
SFP module type must be matched to the type of fiber-optic cable that is installed.
Single mode and multimode fiber-optic cable in various core/cladding diameters
which contribute to the overall distance limit, can be used with specific SFP mod-
ules.
Related information
337
Control Network Specifications
Figure G-77: RM100s with Fiber Uplinks and FP20s with Fiber and Twisted Pair
Uplinks
DeltaV Operator Stations and ProPlus
4,12
1 3 5
RM100-EM-8MM-FX
7
Network Switch RM100
1 3 5
RM100-EM-8MM-FX
7
RM100 Network Switch RM100 1.1
2.1
RM100 Base Module
2.3 2.5 2.7
Network Switch RM100
1 3 5
RM100-EM-8MM-FX
7
Network Switch RM100
1 3 5
RM100-EM-8MM-FX
7
RM100
FAULT
RUN
LOCK
P
USB
V.24
Primary FAULT
RUN
LOCK
P
USB
V.24
Secondary
2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
1.2 1.2
8
LS DA FAULT
Network Switch
P FAULT
FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)
RUN LOCK
8
1
LS DA
P FAULT
USB
RUN LOCK
USB
To additional
V.24
13 13 To additional V.24
FP20 switch
1 2
DA
FP20 switch
2
LS 3 4 1 2
DA
2
5 6 LS 3 4
5 6
6
Primary Network Switch FAULT
6
Secondary
FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)
8
LS DA FAULT
Network Switch
P FAULT
FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)
RUN LOCK
8
1
LS DA
P FAULT
USB
RUN LOCK
To additional
USB
V.24
To additional V.24
FP20 switch
1 2
DA
FP20 switch
2
LS 3 4 1 2
DA
2
5 6 LS 3 4
1,2,12 5 6
6 1,2,12
Primary Network Switch FAULT
6
Secondary
FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)
8
LS DA FAULT
Network Switch
P FAULT
FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)
RUN LOCK
8
1
LS DA
P FAULT
USB
RUN LOCK
USB
To additional
V.24
To additional V.24
FP20 switch
1 2
DA
FP20 switch
2
LS 3 4 1 2
DA
2
5 6 LS 3 4
5 6
6
Primary Network Switch FAULT
6
Secondary
FP20 +24V(P1) 0V 0V +24V(P2)
LS DA
RUN
P FAULT
LOCK
8 Network Switch
FP20 +24V(P1)
FAULT
0V 0V +24V(P2)
8
1
LS DA
P FAULT
USB
RUN LOCK
USB
V.24
V.24
1 2
DA
2
LS 3 4 1 2
DA
2
5 6 LS 3 4
5 6
11 Ground
Shield
11 Ground
Shield
5
Network Switch FAULT Network Switch FAULT
LS
1
DA
RUN
P FAULT
LOCK
1,2,12 LS
1
DA
RUN
P FAULT
LOCK
5
USB USB
V.24
10 V.24 10
1 2 1 2
DA DA
8
2 2
LS 3 4 LS 3 4
5 6 5 6
8 3
1,2,12
Callout Description
1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair
cable is required between switches.
2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.
338
Control Network Specifications
Callout Description
3 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45
connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's
DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of
ground is made at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this
cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.
5 Use a ring tongue terminal to connect the ground screw of the switch to a suitable
shield ground. This connection provides a ground for the twisted pair Ethernet shiel-
ded connectors.
6 The type of uplink ports on this switch are determined by the switch part number. In
this example, all FP20 switches have one 100Mbit/sec full duplex single mode fiber-
optic uplink ports. Other uplink port types are available in fixed hardware configura-
tions. SFP ports are not available on this switch and this switch has no gigabit capa-
ble ports.
7 This switch has two fixed 10/100/1000Mbit/sec uplink ports and two SFP uplink
ports. The SFP ports can be fitted with optional fiber-optic SFP transceivers for long
distance communications. Only two uplinks can be active at a time in any combina-
tion of twisted pair and SFP. Refer to the ordering information for the available SFP
transceivers.
8 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed, auto-negotiate duplex,
and auto-detect polarity. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair
switch ports or duplex mismatches, which create communications failures, could
occur. Always allow the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex. All
unused ports of the switch can be deactivated (locked down) by a software com-
mand from the DeltaV station after all initial connections are made to the switch. If
additional controllers or workstations need to be connected to unused ports after
the initial lock down, an additional software command from the DeltaV station is re-
quired to unlock the ports. After the final connections are made, the lock down
command should be reissued to the switch to lock down any remaining unused
ports. Once the ports are in a lock down state, only the original device can commu-
nicate on its original port.
9 If more than one RM100 switch is required to increase port count in an area, use any
of the gigabit uplink ports for the switch-to-switch connection to provide ample
performance headroom on these aggregating links. 100Mbit/sec links can also be
used for this purpose but normally these links are reserved for single devices on the
edge of the network such as controllers and workstations that require much less
bandwidth than switch-to-switch links.
10 The serial port is not required for process communications; it is used only for occa-
sional out-of-band switch setup and management.
11 This connector is used for a +24VDC power supply input and relay contacts.
339
Control Network Specifications
Callout Description
Related information
4,12
To additional 3,12
To additional
RM100 switch RM100 switch
1,2,9
1,2,9
RM100 RM100
Primary Secondary
8 8
7 7
10,11 Primary 10,11 Secondary
MD30 Switch MD30 Switch
1,2,6,8 1,2,6,8
8 8
5 5
Shield Shield
Ground Ground
DeltaV
3,12 Redundant 3,12
Controllers
with Redundant
Network
340
Control Network Specifications
The following figure shows a maximum of four switches in series between two devices
4,12
To additional 3,12
To additional
RM100 switch RM100 switch
1,2,9
1,2,9
RM100 RM100
Primary Secondary
7 8 7 8
FP20 FP20
Switch Switch
8 8
5 5
Shield Shield
Ground Ground
DeltaV
3,12 Redundant 3,12
1,2 Controllers 1,2
with Redundant
Network
Callout Description
1 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. Cat. 5(e) Screened Twisted Pair
cable is required between switches.
2 To prevent ground loops, build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed
RJ45 connector on one end and an isolated, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the
other end. The metal connector end of this cable assembly/link can be placed on
either switch.
341
Control Network Specifications
Callout Description
3 100 m (max) straight-through or crossover cable. The shield on the controller's RJ45
connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controller's
DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of
ground is made at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this
cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.
5 Use a ring tongue terminal to connect the ground screw of the switch to a suitable
shield ground. This connection provides a ground for the twisted pair Ethernet shiel-
ded connectors.
6 The type of uplink ports on this switch are determined by the optional modules
chosen. In this example, all MD30 switches have a gigabit module installed on the
left side of the switch that used for the uplink to the RM100 switch. This module
contains two, 10/100/1000 twisted pair ports and two gigabit SFP slots for various
types of optional SFP transceivers. Only two ports on this module can be used simul-
taneously in any mix. The SFP transceivers are available in singlemode and multi-
mode fiber-optic versions. Each of the remaining six port modules on the right side
of the switch have four 10/100Mbit/sec twisted pair ports for a total of 24 ports and
any combination of ports can be used for 10/100Mbit/sec uplinks to other switches
or for edge devices such as workstations and controllers.Other modules are availa-
ble in 100Mbit/sec only communications in single and multimode fiber-optic ver-
sions.
7 The type of uplink ports on this switch consists of two fixed 10/100/1000Mbit/sec
ports and two SFP ports. The SFP ports can be fitted with optional fiber-optic SFP
transceivers for long distance communications. Only two uplinks can be active at a
time in any combination of twisted pair and SFP. Refer to the ordering information
for the available SFP transceivers.
8 All twisted pair ports are configured to auto-sense speed, auto-negotiate duplex,
and auto-detect polarity. Do not hard-configure speed or duplex on the twisted pair
switch ports or duplex mismatches, which create communications failures, could
occur. Always allow the switch to auto-sense speed and auto-negotiate duplex. All
unused ports of the switch can be deactivated (locked down) by a software com-
mand from the DeltaV station after all initial connections are made to the switch. If
additional controllers or workstations need to be connected to unused ports after
the initial lock down, an additional software command from the DeltaV station is re-
quired to unlock the ports. After the final connections are made, the lock down
command should be reissued to the switch to lock down any remaining unused
ports. Once the ports are in a lock down state, only the original device can commu-
nicate on its original port.
9 If more than one RM100 switch is required to increase port count in an area, use any
of the gigabit uplink ports for the switch-to-switch connection to provide ample
performance headroom on these aggregating links. 100Mbit/sec links can also be
used for this purpose but normally these links are reserved for single devices on the
edge of the network such as controllers and workstations that require much less
bandwidth than switch-to-switch links.
342
Control Network Specifications
Callout Description
10 The serial port is not required for process communications; it is used only for occa-
sional out-of-band switch setup and management.
11 The power connector (not shown) is used for a +24VDC power supply input and re-
lay contacts.
Related information
Important
The DeltaV system requires a specific hardware and software version of the firewall and a special
firewall configuration that includes the packet inspection rules and packet rate limits that have been
tested with the DeltaV system. DeltaV Controller Firewalls ordered from Emerson Process
Management are shipped with the supported software and are pre-configured to operate properly
with the DeltaV system. To ensure that you have the proper firewall configuration and the correct
hardware and software versions, you must purchase the firewall through normal Emerson channels.
Refer to Figure G-80. A detachable screw terminal block is used to supply the required 24
VDC system power to the DeltaV Controller Firewall. The DeltaV Controller Firewall is
installed close to the controllers on the DIN rail and can use the same system power supply
as the controllers. To more tightly control physical access to the firewall, it can be installed
on a DIN rail with a 24 VDC power supply in the equipment room. A set of normally closed,
potential-free relay contacts, also supplied on the detachable terminal block, monitor
proper device functioning.
The ground screw connects to an instrumentation ground to provide a shield ground for
the controller and firewall communications cables.
The 10/100 BASE-T Ethernet port labeled Workstations is for DeltaV workstations only.
Typically, the workstations are connected to a managed switch such as the Cisco 2950
series or Cisco 3750 series managed switches and the switch is connected to the firewall's
workstation port. The 10/100 BASE-T Ethernet port labeled Controllers is for DeltaV
controllers only. Typically, the controllers are connected to a managed switch such as the
Cisco 2950 series or Cisco 3750 series or the Hirschmann managed rail switch and the
switch is connected to the firewall's controller port. For controllers that are distributed
over wider geographic areas, consider using a firewall on a one-to-one basis with each
controller. This is a more secure arrangement because it eliminates the possibility of open
switch ports on the controller side.
343
Control Network Specifications
Item Specification
Input voltage 24 VDC
Input current 400 mA (max)
Twisted pair ports: Controller (protected) and 10/100 BASE-T Ethernet
Workstation (unprotected)
Cable type Category 5e Screened Twisted Pair (ScTP)
Alarm contacts Normally closed. Configurable to Opened if:
Redundant power supply fails
Cables on either or both ports are discon-
nected
Internal fault occurs
Self-Test failure occurs
Controllers supported 8
If more than 8 controllers require firewall pro-
tection, add more firewalls in parallel to share
the communications load.
Workstations supported All combinations of workstations up to normal
DeltaV limits for workstations. Refer to the Sys-
tem Capacities table in Books Online for com-
plete information on workstation limits.
Mounting DIN rail. The firewall can be mounted on the
same DIN rail as the controller.
344
Control Network Specifications
Controller Firewall
Power/
Relay
connectors
P1 2 FAULT Status LEDs
LS/DA STATUS
1 2 V.24
R Reset button
Controllers
Controller port
Workstation
port
Workstations
FAULT
+24V (P1)
+24V (P2)
Serial port
0V
0V
(not used)
V.24
Ground screw
The DeltaV Controller Firewall must be installed on the Primary and Secondary Control
Networks to provide protection on both access ports of the controllers. Among the things
to consider when determining the best location in which to install the DeltaV Controller
Firewall are:
Note
Do not connect a workstation to the controller side of the firewall and do not connect a controller to
the workstation side of the firewall. Incorrect connections will completely bypass firewall protection
for controllers.
Refer to DeltaV Controller Firewall Network Examples for examples of how the DeltaV
Controller Firewall can be used in a Control Network.
345
Control Network Specifications
The DeltaV Controller Firewall can be managed from a Management station. Refer to the
Managing the DeltaV Controller Firewall topic in DeltaV Books Online.
Related information
Figure G-81: DeltaV Controller Firewall with Single Controllers and Switches
Building A Building B
Controllers Controllers
Controllers Controllers
Workstations Workstations
Workstations Workstations
IP Address IP Address
IP Address IP Address
+24 (p1)
+24 (p2)
+24 (p1)
+24 (p2)
+24 (p1)
+24 (p2)
+24 (p1)
+24 (p2)
OV
OV
OV
OV
V.24
Firewall
5
6
2
3 Rack room
Primary switch Secondary switch
Controllers
2
2 V24
Default
Fault
Status Switch Switch P1
LSDA
1
Controllers
2
2 V24
Fault
Default
Status
Workstations
Workstations
IP Address
+24 (p1)
+24 (p2)
IP Address
+24 (p1)
+24 (p2)
Firewall Firewall
Protected
side
Building C
346
Control Network Specifications
The information in the following table applies to both the primary and secondary
connections between all components.
1 100 m (max) straight-through Category 5e Screened Twisted Pair (ScTP) cable. The
shield on the controller's RJ45 connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the con-
troller; not to the controller's DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are float-
ing and the single point of ground is made at the switch to which the controller is
connected. Build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connec-
tor on both ends.
2 100 m (max) straight-through ScTP cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isola-
ted, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of
this cable assembly/link must be placed on the mini-switch and not on the firewall
port.
3 100 m (max) straight-through ScTP cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isola-
ted, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of
this cable assembly/link must be placed on the rack room switch and not on the fire-
wall port.
4 100 m (max) straight-through ScTP cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isola-
ted, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of
this cable assembly/link must be placed on the rack room switch and not on the
workstation.
5 On the mini-switch, attach a separate ground wire to the terminal block screw that
is labeled with the ground symbol and connect this wire to a suitable instrumenta-
tion ground.
6 On the firewall, attach a separate ground wire to the front panel screw that is la-
beled with the ground symbol and connect this wire to a suitable instrumentation
ground.
347
Control Network Specifications
Figure G-82: DeltaV Controller Firewall with Single Controllers and the Single Port
Fiber Switch
Building A Building B
Workstations
Port 1 Port 4 Port 2 Port 5
Port 2 Port 5 Workstations
Workstations IP Address
IP Address
+24 (p1)
+24 (p2)
+24 (p1)
+24 (p2)
IP Address Workstations
Port 2 Port 5
+24 (p1)
+24 (p2)
OV
OV
IP Address
OV
+24 (p1)
+24 (p2)
V.24
V.24
OV
V.24
V.24
Firewall Firewall
6
2
3
Primary switch Rack room 4 Secondary switch
+24 (p1)
+24 (p2)
IP Address
+24 (p1)
+24 (p2)
Firewall Firewall
Protected side
Building C
The information in the following table applies to both the primary and secondary
connections between all components.
1 100 m (max) straight-through Category 5e Screened Twisted Pair (ScTP) cable. The
shield on the controller's RJ45 connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the con-
troller; not to the controller's DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are float-
ing and the single point of ground is made at the switch to which the controller is
connected. Build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connec-
tor on both ends.
2 100 m (max) straight-through ScTP cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isola-
ted, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of
this cable assembly/link must be placed on the mini-switch and not on the firewall
port.
348
Control Network Specifications
3 100 m (max) straight-through ScTP cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isola-
ted, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of
this cable assembly/link must be placed on the rack room switch and not on the fire-
wall port.
4 100 m (max) straight-through ScTP cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isola-
ted, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of
this cable assembly/link must be placed on the rack room switch and not on the
workstation.
5 On the mini-switch, attach a separate ground wire to the terminal block screw that
is labeled with the ground symbol and connect this wire to a suitable instrumenta-
tion ground.
6 On the firewall, attach a separate ground wire to the front panel screw that is la-
beled with the ground symbol and connect this wire to a suitable instrumentation
ground.
349
Control Network Specifications
1 01 05
02 06
03 07
04 08
2
Firewall P1
LSDA
1
2
2 V24
Default
Fault
Status
P1
LSDA
1
2
2 V24
Default
Fault
Status
Controllers Controllers
Workstations Workstations
3 IP Address IP Address
Firewall
+24 (p1)
+24 (p2)
+24 (p1)
+24 (p2)
Pri Sec
OV
OV
V.24 V.24
Switch Switch
5
Primary switch Secondary switch
Rack room
The following figure shows DeltaV Controller Firewalls in a network with more than eight
controllers. Add firewalls to share the communications load if the number of controllers
requiring protection exceeds eight.
350
Control Network Specifications
Figure G-84: DeltaV Controller Firewall with more than Eight Controllers
01 05 09 13
02 06 10 14
03 07 11 15
04 08 12 16
Pri Switch
+24 (p1)
+24 (p2)
+24 (p1)
+24 (p2)
+24 (p1)
+24 (p2)
+24 (p1)
+24 (p2)
Firewall Pri Firewall Sec Firewall
OV
OV
OV
OV
V.24 V.24 V.24 V.24
The information in the following table applies to both the primary and secondary
connections between all components.
1 100 m (max) straight-through Category 5e Screened Twisted Pair (ScTP) cable. The
shield on the controller's RJ45 connector connects only to a Faraday cage in the con-
troller; not to the controller's DC ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are float-
ing and the single point of ground is made at the switch to which the controller is
connected. Build this cable assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connec-
tor on both ends.
2 100 m (max) straight-through ScTP cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isola-
ted, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of
this cable assembly/link must be placed on the mini-switch and not on the firewall
port.
351
Control Network Specifications
3 100 m (max) straight-through ScTP cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isola-
ted, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of
this cable assembly/link must be placed on the rack room switch and not on the fire-
wall port.
4 100 m (max) straight-through ScTP cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isola-
ted, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of
this cable assembly/link must be placed on the rack room switch and not on the
workstation.
5 Attach a separate ground wire to the front panel screw that is labeled with the
ground symbol and connect this wire to a suitable instrumentation ground.
Qualified PCs for use as Management stations can be ordered from Emerson Process
Management; however, Emerson Process Management does not install the management
software. Users must install the management software on the Management station.
Switch management software and DeltaV Controller Firewall management software are
supported only on Management stations, not on DeltaV workstations.
A TFTP server application can be installed on the Management station. A TFTP server can
be used to flash Ethernet switches or archive Ethernet switch configurations. Do not
confuse a Management station with a Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
station that contains additional network management software. The Management station
352
Control Network Specifications
is a basic PC with a web browser that can access the switch or firewall using its IP address
and is capable of displaying graphics, switch network statistics, bar and line graphs, and
firewall logs.
To manage switches and the DeltaV Controller Firewall, Java software must be installed on
the Management station. DeltaV workstations, including the Management station, that
are connected to a DeltaV Control Network should never make connections to the
Internet. To install Java on a Management station, you must download Java from the
Internet to a USB flash drive or other media on a computer that is not connected to the
DeltaV Control Network and then install Java from the USB flash drive to the Management
station. Refer to Downloading Java Software for use on a Management Station in DeltaV
Books Online for information on how to download Java from the Internet to a USB flash
drive.
Emerson Process Management cannot be responsible for the operation of a DeltaV system
if these requirements for a Management station are not strictly followed.
Qualified Ethernet cables that are described in all DeltaV network figures in this Appendix
must be used to connect a Management station to the DeltaV Control Network. When
considering cable shielding, treat the Management station like a DeltaV device.
Additionally for switches, the Management station can be connected to the switch
through the Comm Port of the Management station and the Console Port of the
switch. The Console Port of the switch is a rear-facing port and is a low speed serial
connection. This port is used to set up the switch for telnet and web management and to
give the switch an IP address, name, and password protection. Once the switch has an IP
address, the serial port connection can be disconnected and the switch can be managed
from anywhere on the network using the Management stations web browser or telnet.
Optionally, the serial connection can be kept intact and the link can be used to observe
network statistics, configure ports, and save switch data to the Management station. The
disadvantage of serial port management is that the Management station must be
physically moved from switch to switch to make the physical connections to each switchs
Console port.
353
Control Network Specifications
Using Telnet and Web-based switch management for DeltaV Smart Switches
Command line, Telnet, and Web-based switch management for Cisco switches
Configuring the Cisco 2950, 2950C, and 3550FX, 3750-24TS, 3750-24FS, and
3750G-12S switches for use with the DeltaV system
Managing the DeltaV Controller Firewall
Related information
Note
If the Network Time Protocol Server is a DeltaV workstation, it is automatically assigned an IP
address.
Table G-26: Reserved IP Addresses for the Network Time Protocol Server
Table G-27: Reserved IP Addresses for Switches and the DeltaV Controller Firewall
354
Control Network Specifications
Table G-27: Reserved IP Addresses for Switches and the DeltaV Controller Firewall
(continued)
355
Control Network Specifications
Table G-27: Reserved IP Addresses for Switches and the DeltaV Controller Firewall
(continued)
356
Control Network Specifications
DeltaV Zones
DeltaV Zones is a combination of hardware and software for connecting separate DeltaV
systems or Zones. An Inter-Zone Server (IZS) must be installed in each DeltaV system to
implement zones. The Inter-Zone Servers are connected by an Inter-Zone Control Network
(IZCN). The only function of the Inter-Zone Servers and the Inter-Zone Control Network is
to communicate inter-zone operating data between systems. Refer to DeltaV Books
Online for complete information on implementing zones, zone-to-zone data
communication, and security considerations.
The following figure shows a simple Inter-Zone Control Network in which two DeltaV
systems are connected. It shows how the Inter-Zone Servers connect to the DeltaV
network and to each other.
Zone A
Operator
Inter-Zone ProPLUS Station A
Server A Station A
Inter-Zone
Control
Network
1
Primary 1
1
Secondary 1 1
Primary 1
1 Controller A
Secondary
1 Zone B
Inter-Zone ProPLUS
Server B Station B Operator
Station B
2
Primary
1
1 1
1
Controller B
Secondary
2 2
357
Control Network Specifications
1 100 m (max) straight-through cable. To prevent ground loops, build this cable as-
sembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on one end and an isola-
ted, plastic-enclosed RJ45 connector on the other end. The metal connector end of
this cable assembly/link must be placed on the switch and not on the PC.
2 100 m (max) straight-through cable. The shield on the controllers RJ45 connector
connects only to a Faraday cage in the controller; not to the controllers DC
ground. Therefore, the RJ45 connectors are floating and the single point of ground
is made at the hub or switch to which the controller is connected. Build this cable
assembly with a shielded, metal-enclosed RJ45 connector on both ends.
358
DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies
Appendix H
DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies
Topics covered in this appendix:
Legacy DIN Rail-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to 12 VDC Power
Supplies
Legacy Panel-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to 12 VDC
Legacy Bulk 24 VDC to 12 VDC
Bulk power supplies supply power to the system or to field devices. Power to the system is
isolated from power to field devices. The following figure shows one method of providing
system power and bussed field power with Legacy Bulk Power Supplies.
Figure H-1: System Power and Bussed Field Power Example with Legacy Bulk Power
Supplies
You can use DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies, DeltaV Bulk Power Supplies, or third-party
bulk power supplies. There are three types of DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies:
Legacy Bulk AC to 24 VDC Power Supply (Panel and DIN-rail mounted) Accepts
120/230 VAC power and supplies 24 VDC power to field devices and System Power
Supplies (Dual DC/DC).
359
DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies
Legacy Bulk AC to 12 VDC Power Supply (Panel and DIN-rail mounted) Accepts
120/230 VAC power and supplies 12 VDC power to System Power Supplies (DC/DC)
and System Power Supplies (Dual DC/DC).
Legacy Bulk 24 VDC to 12 VDC Power Supply Accepts 24 VDC power and supplies
12 VDC power to System Power Supplies (DC/DC). This power supply is no longer
available from Emerson Process Management.
Note
Refer to the DeltaV S-series and CHARMs Hardware Reference manual for information on the DeltaV
Bulk Power supplies.
Related information
Table H-1: Legacy DIN Rail-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 and AC to 12 VDC Power Supply
Specifications
Item Specification
AC input Current 120/230 VAC nominal, 90 VAC to 264 VAC
range, 47 Hz to 63 Hz; single-phase
3.6 A for 12 VDC
4.5 A for 24 VDC
Output power rating 60C 24.6 VDC at 12.0 A
12.3 VDC at 12.0 A
Output power rating 70C 24.6 VDC at 9.0 A
12.3 VDC at 9.0 A
Inrush current 40/25 A maximum (hot/cold start)
Hold-up time 20 ms (from 90 to 264 VAC input)
Ripple and Noise 1% PK to PK max (Bandwidth 20 MHz)
Output overvoltage protection 110% - 120%
Power factor 0.98 at full rated load
Input protection Internally fused, non-replaceable fuses.
Note
The internal fuse is for an internal fault condition
only. Shorts and overload will not cause the fuse
to fail.
360
DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies
Table H-1: Legacy DIN Rail-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 and AC to 12 VDC Power Supply
Specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Alarm relay contact rating 30 VDC at 2.0 A, 250 VAC at 2.0 A
Redundancy output isolation diode Integrated in unit Isolation diode not required
Dimensions on horizontal DIN rail Height (max): 13.5 cm (5.3 in.)
Width (max): 24.0 cm (9.5 in.)
Depth (max): 10.6 cm (4.2 in.)
Connections
Table H-2: Legacy DIN Rail-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to 12 VDC Power
Supply Connectors
Connector Description
Input 120/230 VAC
AC+ AC line
AC - AC neutral
Ground
Output 24 VDC
ENA Output Enable (Wire from ENA to ENA RTN is
connected at the factory)
V OUT DC Voltage Output (+)
V OUT DC Voltage Output (+)
RTN DC Voltage Return (-)
RTN DC Voltage Return (-)
SHARE Connection required for redundancy and load-
sharing applications
ENA RTN Output Enable Return (wire from ENA to ENA
RTN is connected at the factory)
Alarm contacts 250 VAC, 30 VDC
RELAY + Relay contacts +
RELAY - Relay contacts -
361
DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies
Images
Figure H-2: Top View Legacy DIN Rail-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to 12
VDC Power Supply
24 cm (9.5 in.)
10.6 cm
(4.2 in.)
ENA RTN
SHARE
V OUT
V OUT
RTN
RTN
ENA
AC+
AC
Figure H-3: Front View Legacy DIN Rail-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to 12
VDC Power Supply
24 cm (9.5 in.)
AC OK
DC OK
MAGNETEK
(5.3 in.)
362
DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies
Item Specification
AC input 120/230 VAC nominal, 90 VAC to 264 VAC
range, 47 Hz to 63 Hz, single-phase
Output rating 24 VDC at 12.5 A 12 VDC at 25 A
DC output power options 300 W at 60C
Input 5A
Inrush current 100/40 A maximum (hot/cold start )
Hold-up time 20 ms (from 90 to 264 VAC input)
Ripple and Noise 1% PK to PK max (Bandwidth 20 MHz)
Output overvoltage protection 125% (5%)
Power factor 0.98 at full rated load
Fuse protection 15 A, 250 VAC 3AB or equivalent, non-replacea-
ble fuses.
Note
The internal fuse is for an internal fault condition
only. Shorts and overload will not cause the fuse
to fail.
363
DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies
Images
Figure H-4: Top View, Legacy Panel-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to 12
VDC Power Supply
39.37 cm (15.5 in.)
1.27 cm 1.90 cm (0.75 in.)
(0.5 in.) 3.17 cm (1.25 in.)
DC Output
bus bar
connections
12.70 cm
Slotted (5.0 in.)
mounting
holes
Figure H-5: End View, Legacy Panel-Mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC and Bulk AC to 12
VDC Power Supply
12.70 cm
1 (5.0 in.)
6.35 cm 2
(2.5 in.)
364
DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies
Item Specification
DC input voltage 24 VDC nominal (30 VDC maximum)
Output rating 12 VDC at 25 A
DC output power options 300 W at 60C and altitude < 914 m (3000 ft)
Power requirement 20 A
Inrush current 25 A/peak (cold start)
Hold-up time 20 ms after loss of nominal DC input voltage for
specified load regulation
Fuse protection GMA-15, 15 A/125 V, non-replaceable fuses
Note
The internal fuse is for an internal fault condition
only. Shorts and overload will not cause the fuse
to fail.
365
DeltaV Legacy Bulk Power Supplies
366
Enclosure and Power Dissipation Guidelines
Appendix I
Enclosure and Power Dissipation Guidelines
Topics covered in this appendix:
Selecting an Enclosure
Power Dissipation Considerations
Example Enclosure Selection Calculations
This appendix explains how to select an enclosure and provides power dissipation
information.
Note
All enclosures must conform to applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations. In addition,
when designing enclosures for the European Union you must ensure that the appropriate EU
Directives have been considered as required (for example, 73/23/EEC Low Voltage Directive and
89/336/EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility, with amendments)
Selecting an Enclosure
To choose an enclosure for your DeltaV system, consider the following items:
System environment
Wire management
Heat dissipation
You can choose from a wide variety of suitable enclosures to protect your system from
adverse environmental conditions. The enclosures range from simple sheet metal boxes to
NEMA 4X-rated enclosures. Select the appropriate type for your specific application.
Figure I-1 and Figure I-2 show example arrangements for mounting your DeltaV system in a
horizontal enclosure. Figure I-3 shows an example arrangement for mounting your DeltaV
system in a vertical enclosure. These figures indicate areas available for wire management.
You can access wiring through gland plates or through conduited entries. The enclosure
supplier can help you select the proper arrangement for your application.
The enclosure must be designed to dissipate the heat generated within the enclosure
properly and to maintain an ambient temperature in the enclosure that is below the rated
temperature for any devices located in the enclosure. The information you need to
properly design the enclosure includes:
367
Enclosure and Power Dissipation Guidelines
The internal temperature of the enclosure cannot exceed the rated temperature for any
devices located in the enclosure.
368
Enclosure and Power Dissipation Guidelines
369
Enclosure and Power Dissipation Guidelines
370
Enclosure and Power Dissipation Guidelines
The following table lists maximum power dissipation for each DeltaV component. To
determine total power dissipation in an enclosure, sum the power requirements of all
components to be mounted within the enclosure.
Note
The power dissipation for each DC-powered discrete and analog device includes the loss of a power
supply which is 75% efficient. If the power supply is not included in the enclosure or a supply with a
different efficiency is used, adjust the dissipation accordingly.
371
Enclosure and Power Dissipation Guidelines
(1) Power dissipation in this card is based on a full load of 3 A at 24 V. Actual dissipation is determined by the following equation: Supply
Voltage x Actual Load Current (8 channels) x [(1/Power Supply Efficiency) - 1] A typical value for eight channels driving a 24 V solenoid is
16.4 W.
(2) Power dissipation in this card is based on a full load of 3.2 A at 24 V. Actual dissipation is determined by the following equation: Supply
Voltage x Actual Load Current (32 channels) x [(1/Power Supply Efficiency) - 1]
(3) Power dissipation in this card is based on a full load of 3.2 A at 24 V. Actual dissipation is determined by the following equation: Supply
Voltage x Actual Load Current (32 channels) x [(1/Power Supply Efficiency) - 1]
372
Enclosure and Power Dissipation Guidelines
(4) Refer to the DeltaV S-series and CHARMs Hardware Reference manual for power dissipation for DeltaV Bulk Power Supplies.
(5) Does not include I/O card dissipation or 2.2 W power supply dissipation. (Assumes power supply is not in the same enclosure as the H1
carrier.)
373
Enclosure and Power Dissipation Guidelines
Assume ambient temperature is 35C. The DeltaV components are rated for an ambient
temperature of 60C. Therefore, the enclosure design temperature rise must be less than
60 - 35 = 25C with 105.1 W of heat dissipation within it.
If the surface area of the enclosure is insufficient to dissipate the heat, you can use cooling
options such as fans or blowers to improve heat dissipation.
Note
The actual temperature rise varies with layout, enclosure location, and other factors. If the
application is critical or if the exact conditions are undetermined, follow your standard corporate/
plant safety standards. Cabinet manufacturers recommend a safety margin of 25%.
374
System Power Guidelines
Appendix J
System Power Guidelines
Topics covered in this appendix:
System Power Supply (AC/DC)
System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC)
Sizing the I.S. System Power Supply
Legacy Bulk Power Supplies for System Power
Sizing the Legacy Bulk Power Supply for Bussed Field Power and System Power
Using Multiple System Power Supplies
Using Multiple Legacy Bulk Power Supplies
This appendix contains important information about DeltaV system power. Refer to the
DeltaV Site Preparation Guide for additional information.
or
8 analog I/O cards
or
4 serial I/O cards
or
4 Series 2 H1 cards
Refer to the installation worksheets for complete information on calculating system power
for all I/O card combinations.
For systems that require additional power, use another System Power Supply (AC/DC) for
load sharing. For systems that require redundant power, connect a second System Power
Supply (AC/DC). Refer to Appendix N for power sizing calculations.
Other options for systems that require additional power are the System Power Supply
(Dual DC/DC) with a bulk power supply. These options do not require an additional two-
wide carrier and are good choices when future expansion is anticipated.
375
System Power Guidelines
Related information
Installation Worksheets
When it is operated on 24 VDC, the System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) is rated for a
maximum of 8 A (4.5 A for older models) of LocalBus power. For systems that require
additional power, use another System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC). For systems that
require redundant power, use a second System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC).
Note
The I.S. Power Supply supplies 60 W and draws 80 W for 24 VDC bulk power supply calculations at
the rated load.
Related information
I/O Cards
Installation Worksheets
376
System Power Guidelines
If you are supplying power to DO cards with high side switches, you must evaluate the
power requirements carefully. Refer to the manufacturers specifications for your field
devices to determine the load.
To provide load sharing if more than 100 percent of the output of a single supply is
required
To supply separate power supplies for redundant equipment
To provide a backup for one or more power supplies in a system
Do not use different product types in multiple system power supply applications. Use the
same product type with the same input voltage (12 VDC or 24 VDC) for either load sharing
applications or redundant applications that use multiple system power supplies.
Note
Your individual requirements for system availability determine where to provide redundancy in a
system. Corporate/plant standards or Hazardous Operations Procedures for your site often provide
guidelines.
The system power supplies provide OR-ing diodes to isolate faults on one supply from the
output provided by the other supply.
Different system constraints apply to each type of DeltaV Power Supply. The following
sections discuss considerations for each type of power supply.
Note
The left slot of the second 2-wide power/controller carrier will NOT provide power to the controller,
only to the I/O subsystem.
377
System Power Guidelines
For some system sizes, I/O power requirements cannot be met by a single supply. In these
cases, you must use multiple supplies for load sharing. By adding a second system power
supply (or more) and additional carriers, you can increase the power available for the I/O.
You may need as many as four supplies for a full system of analog I/O cards.
For load sharing, mount the second supply in either slot of the second power/controller
carrier. Additional supplies mount to the left of the second supply or on a third power/
controller carrier, if needed. The following figure shows an example of four system power
supplies used for load sharing.
Figure J-1: System Power Supply Mounting for Load Sharing with a Simplex
Controller
Note
In an application requiring redundant power to the controller rather than load sharing, the second
system power supply in Figure J-1 would provide only 15 W to the I/O and 10 W to the controller.
Refer to Supplying Redundant System Power to the Controller. Refer also to Table J-1 for
information on LocalBus current provided to the I/O in various controller/power redundancy
situations.
378
System Power Guidelines
The LocalBus power is specified and limited to 8 A. Some cards consume up to 0.5 A of
system power each. Because of this, a system with several cards such as AS-Interface,
Profibus, DeviceNet, and Fieldbus cards can exceed the ratings.
The power can be extended by modifying the wiring associated with the LocalBus Extender
cable. For most applications, the wiring supplied by the factory is correct. However, when
the power must be extended, the black and red auxiliary wires should be removed from
the assembly (at both ends). Additional power can be supplied through the screw
terminals on the left extender. The screw terminals are marked HVCC + and -. Provide 12
VDC at these screw terminals.
Note
The 8-wide carriers must be left-aligned when using 1-wide extenders.
The following figure shows how to extend power using 1-wide extenders. Refer to OR-ing
Diodes for additional information on extending power.
12 VDC
Power
Supply
Isolated common
ground reference
Dedicated plant
ground grid point
379
System Power Guidelines
To provide redundant power to the controller, install a secondary system power supply in
the right slot of the second power/controller carrier, as shown in the following figure. You
must mount the secondary supply in the right slot of the second carrier to provide power
to the controller.
Figure J-3: System Power Supply Mounting for Redundant Controller Power
If you require redundant power to the controller and additional system power supplies for
I/O load sharing, you must mount the secondary system power supply for the controller in
the right slot of the second carrier, as shown in Figure J-3.
The following table shows the LocalBus current provided to the I/O based on the number
of System Power Supplies (AC/DC) and the controller/power redundancy used in the
configuration.
380
System Power Guidelines
Controller/Power Redundancy
Related information
Installation Worksheets
OR-ing Diodes
You can add a second system power supply to provide I/O power redundancy. The second
supply mounts in the right slot of the second 2-wide power/controller carrier, as shown in
the following figure. Power this supply from a separate bulk power supply to provide
power if the primary bulk supply fails.
381
System Power Guidelines
Figure J-4: System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC) Mounting for Redundant Power
To provide redundant power to the controller, install a secondary system power supply in
the right slot of the second power/controller carrier, exactly as the system power supply
mounts as shown in the preceding image. You must mount the secondary supply in the
right slot to provide power to the controller.
The power conversion from 12 VDC is done inside of the system supply. Because of this,
you could decide that it is acceptable to supply power to both system supplies from a
single bulk supply if your application can support that single point of failure.
382
System Power Guidelines
If you have redundant system power supplies, connect the redundant legacy DIN rail-
mounted Bulk AC to 12 VDC power supplies to different System Power Supplies (Dual
DC/DC) on each controller and I/O subsystem.
The legacy DIN rail-mounted Bulk AC to 24 VDC power supply provides 24 VDC power to
field devices and System Power Supplies (Dual DC/DC). This power supply provides
enough power for approximately 40 AI, AO, and dry contact DI cards.
OR-ing Diodes
The legacy DIN rail-mounted Bulk Power Supplies have an integrated OR-ing diode to
isolate power supply faults and are set at 12.3 or 24.6 VDC. If the legacy DIN rail-mounted
Bulk Power Supply is used in a system that requires redundancy or load sharing, connect
the SHARE terminals on the top of the power supplies to terminal strips or bus bars. One or
both of the VOUT (+) and RTN (-) connections must go to the same location.
Figure J-5: Connecting the Legacy DIN Rail-Mounted Bulk Power Supply for
Redundancy or Load Sharing
To terminal strips or
bus bars
+ +
share
Bulk AC to 12 or 24 VDC
power supply
+ +
share
Bulk AC to 12 or 24 VDC
power supply
If the legacy panel-mounted Bulk Power Supply or a bulk power supply from another
manufacturer without OR-ing diodes is used in a system that requires redundant power,
use external OR-ing diodes (such as the Weidmuller USA #998786 dual rectifier diode
module) to isolate power supply faults. Because an external OR-ing diode has a nominal .7
V drop, the output of each supply must be adjusted to account for the drop or the voltage
to the carriers might be too low. The recommended adjustments, after the OR-ing diodes,
are:
383
System Power Guidelines
Verify these voltages with one bulk power supply disabled to ensure operation in a fault
condition.
Note
The system power supply shuts down if the input power exceeds 12.6 V. Do not adjust a 12 V bulk
power supply to more than 12.3 V at the input to the system power supply.
If additional 12 VDC power is required for a carrier, connect the primary and secondary
legacy bulk power supplies (model without integrated OR-ing diodes) through OR-ing
diodes with the output going only to the extender cable, not to the system power supplies
as shown in Figure J-8.
The following table shows the current provided to the system based on the number of
legacy DIN rail-mounted Bulk Power Supplies (AC to 12 and 24 VDC) and whether simplex
or redundant power is used in the configuration. Figure J-6 shows the connections for four
DIN rail-mounted Bulk Power Supplies. A fifth supply can be connected in the same
manner for redundancy.
384
System Power Guidelines
Figure J-6: Connecting Multiple Legacy DIN Rail-Mounted Bulk Power Supplies
Terminal
strips or bus bars
+ +
share
AC+ AC VOUT RTN
Bulk AC to 12 or 24 VDC
power supply
share
+
+ +
AC+ AC VOUT RTN share
Bulk AC to 12 or 24 VDC
power supply
+ +
share
Bulk AC to 12 or 24 VDC
power supply
+ +
share
Bulk AC to 12 or 24 VDC
power supply
Figure J-7shows power and grounding for an AC System Power Supply. Note that the 2-
wide carrier must be connected to the isolated common ground reference or to the DeltaV
instrumentation ground.
385
System Power Guidelines
From AC G
power N 24 VDC
distribution L return (-)
+ + 24 VDC (+)
AC+ AC VOUT RTN
share
+
Bulk AC to 24 VDC
power supply
DC return ground
From AC L 24 VDC
power N return (-) Fuse block 1
distribution G Bussed field
power
connectors
DC
reference 8 DC cards
ground
8-Wide carrier
LEGEND:
To isolated common ground reference L Line
or DeltaV instrumentation ground (DIG) Isolated local N Neutral
ground reference G Ground
Notes:
1. A fuse block and fuse are optional. If you are providing bussed-field power to several carriers from
one power supply, it is recommended that you fuse the line to each carrier.
Figure J-8 shows power and grounding for a 12 VDC System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC).
Note that the 2-wide carrier is not connected to ground because the legacy 12 VDC Bulk
Power Supplies are connected to the isolated common ground reference or to the DeltaV
instrumentation ground.
In Figure J-8, the 24 VDC Bulk Power Supplies are connected together to provide the
redundant bussed field power. The OR-ing diodes are integrated into the power supply.
386
System Power Guidelines
As shown in Figure J-8, the recommended method for connecting redundant bulk power
supplies to redundant system power supplies is to connect the primary bulk power supply
directly to the primary system power supply and to connect the secondary bulk power
supply directly to the secondary system power supply. Do not connect the bulk power
supplies together because a single high-voltage failure in either bulk power supply could
cause both system power supplies to reset which in turn causes both controllers to reset.
OR-ing diodes are not required in this situation.
Also shown in Figure J-8 are OR-ing diodes used for extending 12 VDC power to the carrier.
In this figure, OR-ing diodes are not integrated into the power supply. The primary and
secondary bulk power supplies are connected through OR-ing diodes with the output
going to the extender cable not to the system power supply.
Figure J-8: Power and Grounding for a 12 VDC System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC)
share
share
share
Bulk AC to 12 VDC Bulk AC to 12 VDC Bulk AC to 24 VDC Bulk AC to 24 VDC
power supply power supply power supply power supply
+ +
8 DC cards 8 DC cards
1-Wide carrier
+ +
extender
8-Wide carrier 8-Wide carrier
+
+ +
OR-ing diodes
(only required if not 8 DC cards 8 DC cards 24 VDC
integrated into power bussed
supply) field power
8-Wide carrier 8-Wide carrier
DC reference +
ground
8 DC cards 8 DC cards
Carrier
To isolated common ground reference Isolated local shield bar
or DeltaV instrumentation ground (DIG) ground reference
387
System Power Guidelines
Figure J-9 shows power and grounding for a 24 VDC System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC). It
also shows connections for providing 24 VDC bussed field power. In Figure J-9. the bulk
power supplies are connected together to provide power to the system power supplies
and to provide bussed field power. The OR-ing diodes are integrated into the bulk power
supply. Note that in Figure J-9 the 2-wide carrier is connected to the isolated common
ground reference or to the DeltaV instrumentation ground.
Figure J-9: Power and Grounding for a 24 VDC System Power Supply (Dual DC/DC)
+
+
AC+ AC + + AC+ AC + +
VOUT RTN VOUT RTN
share
share
Bulk AC to 24 VDC Bulk AC to 24 VDC
power supply power supply
+
24 VDC bussed
field power
8 DC cards 8 DC cards
2-Wide carrier
DC
reference 8 DC cards 8 DC cards
ground
388
Bussed Field Power Guidelines
Appendix K
Bussed Field Power Guidelines
Topics covered in this appendix:
Implementing Bussed Field Power for Applications using DI and DO Cards
Sizing R-C Snubbers
Many of the I/O cards use 24 VDC bussed field power to power their devices. These cards
are designed to operate at 21.6 to 26.4 VDC (24 VDC 10%). To minimize field wiring, you
can connect a power source directly to the I/O interface carrier to provide power to field
devices that are connected to these cards. It is recommended that the power source is a
DeltaV Bulk Power Supply or Legacy Bulk Power Supply. Be sure that the power supply
allows the voltage to the carrier to be within the 21.6 to 26.4 VDC range required for the
cards that use bussed field power. Some I/O cards use a voltage other than 24 VDC and
others do not use bussed field power to power their associated field devices. Refer to the S-
series and CHARMs Hardware Reference manual for information on the DeltaV Bulk Power
Supplies.
Note
The bussed field power connection on the top of the carrier provides power to the field through the
I/O cards only. Extending power from this connection to additional field devices is not supported or
appropriate.
If the system requires redundant bulk power supplies or multiple bulk power supplies for
load sharing, it is recommended that the DeltaV Bulk Power supplies are used in
conjunction with DeltaV Redundancy Modules.
Related information
If you use DeltaV discrete input cards (isolated or dry contact) to sense a contact closure in
a field device, use an arc suppression device at the contact. This arc suppression device can
be an R-C snubber or a varistor, as shown in the following figure for isolated discrete
inputs.
389
Bussed Field Power Guidelines
Figure K-1: Arc Suppression Device Examples for Contact Closure Detection (Isolated
Discrete Input Cards)
The following table lists example R-C values based on the load provided by the input card
and the formulas provided in the Sizing R-C Snubbers topic.
If you use DeltaV isolated discrete input cards to sense solid state devices such as triacs,
you may need to place some resistance in parallel with the input to avoid false triggering
due to leakage currents. Size the resistor so that the voltage level generated by leakage
current through the switch is less than the upper limit for OFF voltage at the input card.
The resistor wattage must support the following calculation for dissipation when the
switch is ON:
V
Watts = Vx
R
where:
V=voltage
R=resistance
You can use DeltaV dry contact discrete input cards to sense a solid state device only if the
leakage of the switch is less than the upper limit for OFF current of the input card. The
following table lists the upper limit of the OFF current for the DeltaV input cards.
390
Bussed Field Power Guidelines
If you use DeltaV AC discrete output cards (high-side or isolated) to drive inductive loads
such as relay coils, it is recommended that the kickback from the coil be suppressed at the
coil with an R-C snubber or a varistor. Figure K-2 is a wiring diagram example for a high-
side discrete output. Sizing for the suppressor is load-dependent; refer to the Sizing R-C
Snubbers topic and to the documentation for the field device or suppressor.
Figure K-2: Examples for Driving Inductive Loads with AC Output Cards (High-Side
Discrete Output)
If you use DC discrete output cards to drive inductive loads such as relay coils, it is
recommended that the kickback from the coil be suppressed at the coil by a parallel
reverse-biased diode (such as a 1N4004). The following figure is a wiring diagram example
for a high-side discrete output.
Figure K-3: Example for Driving Inductive Loads with DC Output Cards (High-Side
Discrete Output)
391
Bussed Field Power Guidelines
If your field device has low current requirements, you can connect a loading resistor in
parallel with your load to limit the effect of leakage currents on DeltaV discrete AC output
cards. Size the resistor to provide a total load of 10 mA and to handle the heat dissipation
for this load. For example, a 12 K , 2 W resistor is appropriate for 120 VAC and a 23 K , 3
W resistor is appropriate for 230 VAC.
In electrically noisy environments, place one varistor in parallel with the field terminal
blocks at the I/O card and another varistor in parallel with the bussed field power
connection to the carrier. Size the varistor for 20% above the nominal line voltage.
Related information
Note
R-C Snubbers are used with I/O cards only not with CHARM I/O.
Use the following calculations to size the R-C snubber that is appropriate for your
application. Always round up to the next value available.
DC Applications
AC Applications
392
Bussed Field Power Guidelines
For example, using a 120 VAC source and driving a 0.5 A load:
393
Bussed Field Power Guidelines
394
Controller Redundancy
Appendix L
Controller Redundancy
Topics covered in this appendix:
Installing a Redundant Controller
Powering Redundant Controllers
The DeltaV system supports redundant controllers. The following figure shows a simple
system with redundant controllers and a redundant Control Network.
LEGEND:
= Shielded connectors
395
Controller Redundancy
5. The added Controller's Power LED should turn on and the Error LED should blink for a
few seconds. Then, all 6 of the LEDs should turn on for about 2 seconds, followed by
the LEDs turning off except for the Power LED, which should always remain on. At
this point, the Standby LED and the two communications LEDs should start to blink
(Standby Controller becomes Commissioned).
6. Download the ProfessionalPLUS workstation. (Use the DeltaV Explorer to perform
the downloads.)
7. Download the setup data to the controller. The two communications LEDs should
continue to blink for a few minutes and the Standby LED should turn on solid
(Standby Controller becomes configured). The Standby Controller is now ready to
take over if the Active Controller fails.
396
Controller Redundancy
For redundant I/O power, ensure that there is enough power for the active controller and
I/O if one power supply fails. If the two power supplies are not capable of providing
redundant power to the controllers and I/O cards, you can install an additional carrier and
power supplies to the left of the controller carrier.
397
Controller Redundancy
398
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
Appendix M
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
Topics covered in this appendix:
VerticalPLUS Carriers
4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power/Controller Carriers
4-Wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater Carriers
4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power Carriers
8-Wide VerticalPLUS I/O Interface Carriers
1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extenders and Cables
Installing VerticalPLUS Carriers
There are two types of DeltaV vertical carriers: VerticalPLUS and Legacy Vertical.
VerticalPLUS carriers can be used for DeltaV basic process control systems as well as for
DeltaV Safety Instrumented Systems (SIS). Legacy Vertical carriers cannot be used for
DeltaV SIS. The next section describes the VerticaPLUS carriers. Refer to the related topics
for information on Legacy Vertical carriers.
For both vertically and horizontally mounted systems, the LocalBus, including all cabling,
cannot be longer than 6.5 m (21.3 ft).
Note
In this Appendix, references to left and right, top and bottom, assume that you are facing the
equipment.
Important
The vertical carriers are mounted properly when the lettering is in the upright position.
Important
Vibration will cause vertical carriers to slip down on the DIN rail and disconnect from the carrier
above it. It is highly recommended that you install a stop on the DIN rail to prevent the carriers from
slipping.
Related information
399
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
VerticalPLUS Carriers
DeltaV VerticalPLUS carriers can be used for DeltaV Safety Instrumented Systems (SIS) and
DeltaV basic process control systems. The Installing Your DeltaV Safety Instrumented
System Hardware manual provides instructions for installing SIS hardware. VerticalPLUS
carriers mount on standard 35 mm. (1.38 in.) T-type DIN rails.
Related information
400
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
401
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
+ +
- -
12 VDC output + + 12 VDC output
- -
DC reference DC reference
ground for 24 ground for 24 VDC power
VDC power only only
402
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
Latch Acess
Hole Latch Acess
Hole
Latch Acess
Latch Acess Hole
Hole
403
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
49-56
Carrier #8
Addressing
Positions
57-64
404
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
There are two types of 1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier extenders and cables:
Note
For SIS systems, the local peer bus must be terminated by 120 ohm BNC terminators at either the 1-
wide carrier extender connected to the last 8-wide carrier or at a 4-wide SISNet Repeater carrier. The
termination location depends upon the carrier configuration. Refer to the Installing Your DeltaV Safety
Instrumented System Hardware manual for information on terminating SIS systems.
The Left 1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier extender connects to the bottom of a left 8-wide
VerticalPLUS carrier or to the top of a right 8-wide VerticalPLUS carrier.
The Right 1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier extender connects to the bottom of a right 8-wide
VerticalPLUS carrier or to the top of a left 8-wide VerticalPLUS carrier.
The 25 pin D-shell connector cable connects to the D-shell connectors labeled A on the 1-
wide VerticalPLUS carrier extenders to extend power. Cable is available in the following
lengths.
405
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
The BNC connector cable connects black-to-black and white-to-white between 1-wide
VerticalPLUS carrier extenders to extend the local peer bus for SIS systems. Refer to the
Installing Your DeltaV Safety Instrumented System Hardware manual for information on the
local peer bus.
Related information
1. Be sure the arrow on the front of the stop is pointing upward towards the device. If
the arrow is pointing downwards away from the device, the screws on the DIN rail
stop could damage pins extending from the device.
2. First hook the end with the deeper notch over the DIN rail and then hook the end
with the more shallow notch over the other side of the DIN rail.
406
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
3. Screw the stop onto the DIN rail being careful not to overtighten the screws. Be sure
that both sides of the DIN rail stop are properly secured. The torque limits are
specified on the DIN rail stop.
407
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
The following figure shows a standard installation with one carrier extender cable used to
extend power from the left to the right carriers.
408
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
Related information
409
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
1. Connect a left 1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier extender to the last 8-wide carrier on the
left side (carrier 3) by sliding together the 96 pin connectors on the carriers.
2. Connect a right 1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier extender to the first 8-wide carrier on
the right side (carrier 4) by sliding together the 96 pin connectors on the carriers.
3. Connect the 25 pin D-shell (male) connector on the extender cable to the D-shell
connector labeled A on the left 1-wide carrier extender and fasten the retainer
screws.
4. Connect the 25 pin D-shell connector on the other end of the cable to the D-shell
connector labeled A on the right 1-wide carrier extender and fasten the retainer
screws.
Related information
Note
If a 4-wide SISNet Repeater carrier is installed on the top right, there is no need for a 1-wide carrier
because power can be extended from the D-shell connectors on the SISNet Repeater carrier.
1. Connect the left 1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier extender or SISNet Repeater carrier to
the last 8-wide carrier on the right side (carrier 6) by sliding together the 96 pin
connectors on the carriers.
2. Connect the right 1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier extender to the first 8-wide carrier on
the left side (carrier 7) by sliding together the 96 pin connectors on the carriers.
3. Connect the 25 pin D-shell (male) connector on the extender cable to the D-shell
connector labeled A on the right 1-wide carrier extender or SISNet Repeater carrier
and fasten the retainer screws.
4. Connect the 25 pin D-shell connector on the other end of the cable to the D-shell
connector labeled A on the left 1-wide carrier extender and fasten the retainer
screws.
410
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
Figure M-10: Power Extended from a Left to Right Carrier and Right to Left
Carrier
Locate the power jumper that is just before this position (count from the power
supply end).
411
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
If multiple power supplies are used, be sure they are grounded at the same point.
WARNING!
Removing the jumper removes all 12 VDC power to all cards on all downstream carriers.
When 12 VDC power is removed, cards are unable to hold the last value.
Related information
Bussed field power can be extended to VerticalPLUS carriers if the addition of the next I/O
card does not exceed the 13 A rating of the connection to the source. The following figure
shows the screw terminal assignments on the VerticalPLUS carriers bussed field power
connections.
412
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
WARNING!
For VerticalPLUS carriers, field power for one I/O card can be extended to additional I/O cards
only if they have the same field voltage requirements.
+ Field Power
Connections
- Field Power
Connections
4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5
If the bussed field power supplies one I/O card only and is not extended to additional I/O
cards such as in redundant card applications, connect the wiring to the assigned screw
terminal connections on the I/O interface carrier as shown in Figure M-13.
CAUTION!
Ensure that the factory installed jumpers are removed from the connectors if only one I/O card
is to be powered.
413
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
Figure M-13: Bussed Field Power Wiring for One Power Supply Per I/O Card on
VerticalPLUS Carriers
DC AC DC AC
+ L - N
- N + L
WARNING!
When supplying 250 VAC to adjacent bussed field power connections, be sure both sources are
the same phase.
If the bussed field power is extended to two I/O cards, connect the wiring to the assigned
screw terminal connections on the I/O interface carrier as shown in the following figure. Be
sure that jumpers are installed as shown in the figure.
414
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
Figure M-14: Bussed Field Power Wiring for One Power Supply Per Two Cards
DC AC DC AC
+ L - N
- N + L
WARNING!
When supplying 250 VAC to adjacent bussed field power connections, be sure both sources are
the same phase.
If the bussed field power is extended to four I/O cards, connect wiring to the assigned
screw terminal connections on the I/O interface carrier as shown in the following figure. Be
sure that jumpers are installed as shown in the figure.
415
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
Figure M-15: Bussed Field Power Wiring for One Power Supply Per Four I/O Cards
Return - N
Optional Wires to
Extend Power to
Supply + L
Next Connector Slots
Supply Return Connection
Related information
There are 4 types of Legacy Vertical carriers for mounting vertically in a cabinet:
There are two separate cable lengths for connecting the 8-wide Legacy Vertical I/O
interface carriers:
If you are installing Legacy Vertical carriers in high vibration areas, it is highly
recommended that you install a DIN rail stop to prevent the carriers from slipping down on
the DIN rails.
416
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
Related information
Top 4-wide Legacy Vertical power/controller carriers connect to the left Legacy
Vertical 8-wide I/O interface carrier. The 96 pin connector is at the bottom of this
carrier. (The left 8-wide Legacy Vertical I/O interface carrier holds cards 1-8 from top
to bottom.)
Bottom 4-wide Legacy Vertical power/controller carriers connect to the right 8-wide
Legacy Vertical I/O interface carrier. The 96 pin connector is at the top of this carrier.
(The right 8-wide Legacy Vertical I/O interface carrier holds cards 8-1 from top to
bottom.)
Up to two controllers (primary and secondary) and two system power supplies mount on
the 4-wide Legacy Vertical power/controller carriers. The following figure shows the top
and bottom 4-wide Legacy Vertical carriers.
417
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
Left 8-wide I/O interface carrier (card positions 1-8 from top to bottom)
Right 8-wide I/O interface carrier (card positions 8-1 from top to bottom)
The following figure shows the left and right 8-wide Legacy Vertical I/O interface carriers.
418
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
Figure M-17: Left and Right 8-Wide Legacy Vertical I/O Interface Carriers
419
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
Note
The 8-wide Legacy Vertical I/O carriers are designed with a split high-side power plane and a shared
common return plane. A jumper bridges both high-side planes for a continuous conductive path. If
additional power is required, you can break this high-side path and add another power source to the
unpowered end.
To decide when to use external power, calculate the power used per position on the
carrier. Add these values to determine if they exceed the power supplys capabilities. If the
calculation of a given position exceeds the power supplys capabilities:
Locate the power jumper that is just before this position (count from the power
supply end).
Insert additional power at this node.
If multiple power supplies are used, be sure they are grounded at the same point.
WARNING!
Removing the jumper removes all 12 VDC power to all cards on all downstream carriers.
When 12 VDC power is removed, cards are unable to hold the last value.
CAUTION!
On the right 8-wide Legacy Vertical carriers removing the jumper only disconnects the
96 pin carrier connector; it does not disconnect the 48 pin cable connector.
420
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
This caution only applies if power is extended to a right 8-wide Legacy Vertical
carrier with a cable connected to it. As an example, in the configuration shown in the
following figure power should be extended at carriers 3 and 5. This allows carriers 1
and 2 to receive power from the system power supply; carriers 3 and 4 to receive
power extended at carrier 3; and carriers 5, 6, 7, and 8 to receive power extended at
carrier 5.
1 2 3 4
Top
4-wide carrier
1
Bussed field
7
2
2
power connector 6
3 C7
3
4
4
5
C1 C6
4
5
5
3
6
6
2
7
7
1
8
8
8
1
1
7
2
2
6
3
3
4
4
5
C2 C5
C8
4
5
5
3
6
6
2
7
7
1
8
8
Remove jumper and Remove jumper
extend power here 8 and extend power
1
here
7
2
6
3
4
C3 C4
4
5
3
6
2
7
1
8
2
The following figure shows a typical Legacy Vertical configuration with six, 8-wide
I/O interface carriers.
421
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
Top Position
Vertical
4-Wide
Mounted
Carrier
DIN Rail
Carrier #1 Carrier #6
Addressing Addressing
Positions Positions
01 - 08 41 - 48
Carrier #2
Carrier #5
Addressing
Addressing
Positions
Positions
09 - 16
33 - 40
Bussed
Field
Power
Connector
Carrier #3 Carrier #4
Addressing Addressing
Positions Positions
17 - 24 25 - 32
Another Legacy Vertical configuration uses the top cable extender to bridge a left to
right 8-wide I/O Interface carrier, as shown here.
422
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
Figure M-21: Top Cable Extender Bridging Left and Right Legacy Vertical I/O Interface Carriers
LEFT RIGHT LEFT
DIN Rail DIN Rail DIN Rail
Mounting Mounting Mounting
Top Position
Vertical
4-Wide Carrier
Mounted
DIN Rail
Carrier #5
Carrier #4
Addressing
Addressing
Positions
Positions
Carrier #1 33 - 40
25 - 32
Addressing
Positions
Top Cable Extender
01 - 08
Bussed
Field
Power
Connector
Carrier #2
Addressing
Positions
09 - 16 Carrier #3
Addressing
Positions
17 - 24
423
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
Carrier #1
Carrier #4
Addressing Bussed
Positions Addressing
Field Positions
01 - 08 Power 25 - 32
Connector
Bottom
Position
4-Wide
Carrier
DIN Rail
DIN Rail
The bottom cable extender connects a left I/O carrier (card position 1-8) to a right
I/O carrier (card positions 8-1) at the bottom of the DIN rails. The bottom cable
extender exits in a downward direction.
The top cable extender connects a right I/O carrier (card position 8-1) to a left I/O
carrier (card positions 8-1) on the opposite side of the cabinet at the top of the DIN
rails. The top cable extender exits in an upward direction.
The figures in "4-Wide Legacy Vertical Power/Controller Carriers" show how the bottom
cable extender is used in a typical legacy vertical configuration and how the top cable
extender is used as a bridge.
Note
Failure to use the correct cables can result in a corrupt addressing scheme.
424
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
Related information
Figure M-23: Standard Configuration for an Eight Carrier Legacy Vertical System
1 2 3 4
Top
4-wide carrier
8
1
1
Bussed field
7
2
2
power connector 6
C7
3
3
4
4
5
C1 C6
4
5
5
3
6
6
2
7
7
1
8
8
Top cable extender
(2-meters/78.74 inches)
8
1
1
7
2
6
3
3
4
4
5
C2 C5
C8
4
5
5
3
6
2
7
7
1
8
8
1
7
2
6 Notes
3
4
3
6
The length to carriers 6 and 7 (C6 and C7) is not counted in the overall length calculation
since C6 and C7 are considered spurs and are not in series with the rest of the system. Spur
lengths are equal to or less than the total system length.
425
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
Refer to preceding figure. There are three carrier ends: 6, 7, and 8. For a vertically mounted
system, the signal path starts at the first carrier. The following table shows how to
calculate the lengths to the three carrier ends. The cable lengths are 1m. (39.37 in.) or 2m
(78.74 in.) and the carrier lengths (C) are 22 inches.
Note
Do not connect additional carriers to spurs as this will corrupt the addressing scheme. Referring to
Figure M-23, if you connect a carrier to the end of carrier 6, it will become carrier 7. In the addressing
scheme shown in the figure, carrier 7 already exists at the end of the 2 meter cable.
Related information
426
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
Note
The middle two screws are for G-rail mounting and the outer screws are for T-rail mounting.
427
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
Previously
Mounted T-Rail or G-Rail
Top Position
4-wide Carrier
Bussed Field
Power Connector
Carrier
Push Push
Shield
and and
Bar
Hold Hold
Wiring
Point for
Shield
Bar
Previously
Mounted
Bottom
Position
Push
4-wide Carrier
and
Hold
Note
The middle two screws are for G-rail mounting and the outer screws are for T-rail mounting.
4. If you are mounting 8-wide carriers on separate rails, use the bottom cable extender
for a left-to-right bridge and the top cable extender for a right-to-left bridge.
5. Install ground wiring as shown in the following figure. For a good connection, use a
signal ground cable and a block spade terminal, sized for AC/DC system power.
428
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
DC
Reference
Ground I/O Carrier
Shield Bar
Bussed
Field
Power
Connector
Connects To
Shield Bar on
Next I/O Carrier
Related information
429
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
Note
Be sure that the bottom cable extender exits in a downward position and the top cable extender exits
in an upward position.
CAUTION!
Be careful when inserting sockets and plugs. The connectors are fragile and bend easily. Ensure
that the pins are straight before connecting the cable ends.
430
Installation Worksheets
Appendix N
Installation Worksheets
Topics covered in this appendix:
Installation Information Checklist
Worksheets for Calculating Power Requirements
Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field
Power
Worksheet for Products Using Only 24 VDC Power
Worksheet for System Power Requirements - 24 VDC Power Input
Worksheet for System Power Requirements - 12 VDC Input
Worksheet for Bulk Power Requirements
Worksheet for Intrinsically Safe System Power Requirements
This appendix provides worksheets to calculate your system power supply requirements
and includes a checklist that you can use to create your own worksheets to document your
installation.
431
Installation Worksheets
Related information
I/O Cards
Power Dissipation Considerations
Use the Worksheet for Intrinsically Safe System Power Requirements to determine the
number of power supplies required for Intrinsically Safe systems and add the total number
of I.S. power supplies to the Worksheet for Products Using Only 24 VDC Power.
Make a copy of the tables and use them for each DeltaV system in your plant. If you are
using redundant power, remember to include calculations for redundant system power.
For products that use 12 VDC LocalBus power and 24 VDC bussed field power, use
the Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field
Power to record quantity for each product and multiply quantity by the required
amperage to determine the:
- 12 VDC LocalBus power requirements for each product
- 24 VDC bussed field power requirements for each product
Enter the totals in the appropriate column (12 VDC or 24 VDC) in the Worksheet for
Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field Power. Add the total
amperage requirements to get a subtotal of amperage requirements for all products and
enter the subtotal as Subtotal 1.
For products that use 24 VDC power, use the Worksheet for Products Using Only 24
VDC Power to record quantity for each product and multiply quantity by the
required amperage to determine the:
- 24 VDC power requirements for each product
- Number of Intrinsically Safe power supplies (if I.S. cards are used) required for I.S.
systems and add the total number of I.S. power supplies to the worksheet. Use
the Worksheet for Intrinsically Safe System Power Requirements to determine
the number of I.S. power supplies.
- Enter the totals in the 24 VDC column in the worksheet.
432
Installation Worksheets
24 VDC Systems
For 24 VDC systems, use the Worksheet for System Power Requirements - 24 VDC
Power Input to determine the:
- Number of system power supplies required to power the I/O cards.
- Amperage required from the legacy bulk 24 VDC power supplies to power the
system power supplies and bussed field power requirements.
12 VDC Systems
For 12 VDC systems, use the Worksheet for System Power Requirements - 12 VDC
Power to determine the:
- Number of system power supplies required to power the I/O cards.
- Amperage required from the legacy bulk 12 VDC Power Supplies to power the
system power supplies and 24 VDC bussed field power requirements.
Use the Worksheet for Bulk Power Requirements to determine the number of legacy bulk
power supplies required.
Related information
Table N-1: Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed
Field Power
Curent Required for Each Product (A) Total for Product Type
(1) Require no LocalBus current as controllers are powered separately by the system power supply.
433
Installation Worksheets
Table N-1: Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed
Field Power (continued)
Curent Required for Each Product (A) Total for Product Type
434
Installation Worksheets
Table N-1: Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed
Field Power (continued)
Curent Required for Each Product (A) Total for Product Type
(2) For Series 2 cards in redundant applications, the numbers shown in the table are for each card of a redundant pair. For example, the power
required for a redundant pair of Series 2 DO cards is .300 A at 12 VDC and a maximum of 3 A at 24 VDC for 24 VDC field power.
435
Installation Worksheets
Table N-1: Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed
Field Power (continued)
Curent Required for Each Product (A) Total for Product Type
436
Installation Worksheets
Table N-1: Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed
Field Power (continued)
Curent Required for Each Product (A) Total for Product Type
437
Installation Worksheets
Miscellaneous Products
438
Installation Worksheets
Table N-2: Worksheet for Products Using Only 24 VDC Power (continued)
Miscellaneous Products
439
Installation Worksheets
Table N-2: Worksheet for Products Using Only 24 VDC Power (continued)
Miscellaneous Products
Subtotal 2 N/A
(3) Older models of the Dual DC/DC System Power Supply provided 4.5 A of +12 V power and required 4.0 A input from +24 V power.
440
Installation Worksheets
As an example, suppose your calculations from the Worksheet for Products Using 12 V
LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field Power showed that the total 12 VDC LocalBus
power requires 6.1 A. Calculate the number of power supplies that you will need as follows:
6.1 A/8.0 A/supply = 0.76 or 1 system power supply for simplex power
(4) If your system requires redundant system power, a redundant system power supply can be added to either a 2-wide horizontal carrier,
(may require an additional 2-wide carrier) or to the 4-wide vertical carrier.
441
Installation Worksheets
Related information
Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field Power
Worksheet for System Power Requirements - 12 VDC Input
Worksheet for System Power Requirements - 24 VDC Power Input
(5) The current required for I/O cards is included in the calculations in Table N-1 and is transferred from Table N-1 to Table N-4 as Subtotal 1.
The system power supply requires 1.8 A from the Bulk 12 VDC Power Supply to provide the power for each controller (one controller as-
sumed for each system power supply.) If on a large system, the current exceeds: the 8 A limit for horizontally mounted systems, the 15 A
limit for vertically mounted systems, or the 13 A system power supply limit, use the cable extender and split the 12 VDC as described in
Appendix J
442
Installation Worksheets
Suppose your calculations from the Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power
and 24 VDC Bussed Field Power showed that the total 12 VDC power requires 6.1 A.
Calculate the number of power supplies required as follows:
6.1 A/13 A/supply =.47 or 1 system power supply for simplex power and 2 system power supplies for
redundant power.
(6) The system power supply requires 1.8 A from the Bulk 12 VDC Power Supply to provide the power for each controller (one controller as-
sumed for each system power supply.)
443
Installation Worksheets
If on a large system, the currents exceeds: the 8 A limit for horizontally mounted systems,
the 13 A system power supply limit, or the 15 A limit for vertically mounted systems, use
the cable extender and split out the 12 VDC as described in "System Power Guidelines" for
horizontal systems and "DeltaV Vertical Carriers" for vertical systems.
Related information
Worksheet for Products Using 12 V LocalBus Power and 24 VDC Bussed Field Power
Worksheet for Products Using Only 24 VDC Power
System Power Guidelines
DeltaV Vertical Carriers
Total Amps Needed for Sys- Total Amps Available for sys-
tem tem
444
Installation Worksheets
Total Amps Needed for Sys- Total Amps Available for sys-
tem tem
445
Installation Worksheets
Total Amps Needed for Sys- Total Amps Available for sys-
tem tem
(7) An OR-ing diode is required for redundant bulk power supplies. Refer to Appendix I for information.
446
Installation Worksheets
Related information
447
Installation Worksheets
448
Intrinsically Safe I/O
Appendix O
Intrinsically Safe I/O
Topics covered in this appendix:
Intrinsically Safe LocalBus Isolator
Intrinsically Safe Carrier Extenders
The DeltaV system includes the following Intrinsically Safe I/O components:
I/O cards
- I.S. DI, 16-Channel
- I.S. DO, 4-Channel
- I.S. AI, 8-Channel, 4-20, mA HART
- I.S AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA and I.S AO, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA HART
Terminal Blocks
- I.S. 8-Channel terminal block
- I.S. 16-Channel terminal block
I.S. Power Supply
I.S. LocalBus Isolator
Right and left hand carrier extenders
Carriers
- I.S. 8-Wide carrier
- Power Supply carrier
- Isolator carrier
WARNING!
Be sure that your I.S. I/O cards and terminal blocks are compatible before plugging in I/O cards.
Card damage can result if an I/O card and terminal block are incompatible.
WARNING!
In any hazardous area installation it is important to read and follow the device manufacturer's
design and installation documents. Failure to follow the documentation could result in an
unapproved and unsafe application. Additionally, in hazardous locations follow your plant's
procedures for making the area safe during installation and maintenance operations.
You can use both I.S. and non-I.S. I/O cards within one DeltaV system. However, you must
separate the I.S. cards from the non-I.S. cards with a LocalBus Isolator to protect the I.S.
cards from damaging voltages. Only one LocalBus Isolator can be used in the DeltaV
system. Plan your I/O subsystem carefully because you cannot add non-I.S. cards beyond
449
Intrinsically Safe I/O
the LocalBus Isolator. If you use multiple I.S. system power supplies, intersperse the power
supplies among the cards. Refer to DeltaV Scalable Process System with Zone 0 Field Circuits
Installation Instructions (Part Number - 12P1990) for detailed information on wiring
multiple I.S. system power supplies. This manual is on the DeltaV Documentation Library
DVD. The following figure shows a LocalBus Isolator separating non-I.S. and I.S. cards.
Localbus
System Power Isolator
Supply
Non-IS I/O Cards IS IS I/O Cards RH Carrier
Controller (Gray Terminal Blocks) Power Supply (Blue Terminal Blocks) Extender
Important
Field power is provided by the I.S. I/O cards. Do not connect to the connectors on the top of the I.S.
8-wide carrier.
The following figure shows the grounding requirements for an I.S. I/O subsystem.
450
Intrinsically Safe I/O
Dedicated
Plant Ground
Grid Point
IS
Localbus Power
Isolator Supply
Related information
Item Specification
Input 12 V @ 60 mA maximum
Output 12 V @ 60 mA maximum
Power dissipation within module 1.2 W maximum
Mounting LocalBus Isolator carrier
The controller is non-I.S. You must always use an I.S. LocalBus Isolator to isolate the
controller from I.S. cards.
451
Intrinsically Safe I/O
452
Intrinsically Safe I/O
453
Intrinsically Safe I/O
454
Product Type Numbers for DeltaV Non-SIS Hardware
Appendix P
Product Type Numbers for DeltaV Non-SIS
Hardware
The following table shows the product type numbers for all DeltaV non-SIS hardware
products.
Table P-1: DeltaV non-SIS Hardware Products Crossed Referenced to Product Type
Numbers
455
Product Type Numbers for DeltaV Non-SIS Hardware
Table P-1: DeltaV non-SIS Hardware Products Crossed Referenced to Product Type
Numbers (continued)
456
Product Type Numbers for DeltaV Non-SIS Hardware
Table P-1: DeltaV non-SIS Hardware Products Crossed Referenced to Product Type
Numbers (continued)
457
Product Type Numbers for DeltaV Non-SIS Hardware
Table P-1: DeltaV non-SIS Hardware Products Crossed Referenced to Product Type
Numbers (continued)
458
Glossary
Glossary
This glossary includes explanations of the symbols, acronyms, and terms used in this
manual.
459
Glossary
Symbol Units
W watt
F microFarad
460
Glossary
Acronym Definition
RAM Random-Access Memory
ROM Read-Only Memory
SIMM Single In-Line Memory Module
UL Underwriters Laboratory
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply
UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair
VAC Volts Alternating Current
VDC Volts Direct Current
461
Glossary
Term Definition
Federal Communications Com- A United States government communications standards
mission (FCC) group.
Fiber-optic cable Thin, transparent fibers of glass or plastic that transmit data
through pulses of light from a laser or light-emitting diode
(LED).
Hub Device in a network that consolidates wiring connections and
routes communications. All communications devices on a
hub-based network connect to one or more hubs.
Institute of Electrical and Electron- Independent technical organization that defines standards for
ic Engineers (IEEE) the electrical, electronic, and computer industries.
IEEE 802.3 Set of specifications from the Institute of Electrical and Elec-
tronic Engineers (IEEE) for local area networks (LANs). This
specification provides standards for media access control.
Input/Output (I/O) Signal reception and transmission or signal interfacing. Input,
for an instrument, involves accepting and processing signals
from field devices. Output, for an instrument, involves con-
verting commands into electrical signals to field devices.
International Standards Organiza- International organization that defines manufacturing stand-
tion (ISO) ards.
Instrument Society of America Independent organization that defines instrumentation stand-
(ISA) ards.
Intrinsically Safe field circuits Circuits that are designed to limit the amount of energy provi-
ded to field devices to levels below those that are required to
ignite specific types of hazardous materials under fault and no
fault conditions.
Intrinsically Safe I/O Equipment that contains intrinsically safe field circuits.
Light-emitting diode (LED) Electronic component that generates a small focused beam of
light in response to a current passing through the component.
Local Area Network (LAN) Communications network within a limited physical area that
provide high-speed data transmission.
LocalBus A DeltaV Power/Controller Carrier, its associated DeltaV I/O
Interface Carriers, and the cables that connect them.
Megabit (Mb) One million binary bits.
Military standard (MIL) Standard requirements as set by United States military organi-
zations.
Node Communication device, such as a workstation or controller,
attached to the Control Network.
Object linking and embedding Software standard governing the relationship between soft-
(OLE) ware document files.
OLE for Process Control (OPC) Software standard for OLE applications in process control.
Operating range A sensor type's input signal range over which the accuracy is
stated.
Port Physical connection between an electronic device and a cable.
462
Glossary
Term Definition
Random-access memory (RAM) Type of semiconductor memory. The user can read from and
write to RAM as often as desired.
Read-only memory (ROM) Type of semiconductor memory. Information is stored perma-
nently on ROM; the user can examine ROM contents as often
as desired but cannot change the contents.
Single in-line memory module Plug-in random-access memory (RAM) unit for a computer.
(SIMM)
Underwriters Laboratory (UL) Independent organization that defines electrical standards.
Uninterruptible power supply Battery that supplies continuous power to a computer system
(UPS) if there is a failure or an interruption in the AC power source.
463
Glossary
464
Index
Index
1-Wide VerticalPLUS Carrier Extender AS-Interface card
dimensions 106 LEDs 60
10-Pin Mass Termination Block 218 AS-Interface specifications 134136
10/100BaseT Ethernet cards 255 ATEX Instruction Sheets 87
16-Channel Analog Input Terminal Block 205, 206 author="JForbes" time="20130619T133419-0600" 359
2-Wide Horizontal Power/Controller Carrier author="JForbes" time="20130619T133433-0600" 359
dimensions 94 author="JForbes" time="20130619T133441-0600" 359
installing 18 Autosense I/O cards 82
specifications 94
32-Channel Terminal Block 204, 205 B
4-Wide Legacy Vertical Power/Controller Carrier Books Online 87
installing 427 Bulk 24 VDC to 12 VDC Power Supply 359
specifications 107 Bulk AC to 12 VDC Power Supply 359
4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power Carrier Bulk AC to 24 VDC Power Supply 359
dimensions 103 Bulk power supplies
specifications 103 using multiple 382
4-Wide VerticalPLUS Power/Controller Carrier Bulk power supply
dimensions 102 ground wiring 43
specifications 102 input wiring 43
4-Wide VerticalPLUS SISNet Repeater Carrier installing 43
specifications 104 mounting plate 43
40-Pin Mass Termination Block 220, 221 wiring for bussed field power 22, 23, 25
8-Wide Horizontal I/O Interface Carrier Bussed field power
installing 19 connecting 21, 22
specifications 96 extending 22, 23, 25
8-Wide Legacy Vertical I/O Interface Carrier wiring 22, 23, 25
dimensions 108 Bussed field power guidelines 389
specifications 108
8-Wide VerticalPLUS I/O Interface Carrier
C
dimensions 105
specifications 105 Cable
Category 5 38, 39
color-coded boot 40
A fiber-optic 38, 39
Adding external power 99 fiber-optic specifications 295
AI 16-channel cards installling 40
LEDs 58 testing 49
AI 8-channel cards Cable accessory specifications 295
LEDs 56 Cable shields 37
AI 8-Channel, 15 VDC specifications 126128 Cables for legacy vertical systems 424
AI, 16-Channel, 4-20 mA, HART specifications 128, 130 Calculating system power requirements 431
AI, 8-Channel, 4-20 mA specifications 120, 122 Cards, See I/O Cards
Airborne contaminants 89 Carrier
AO 8-Channel card installing ground wiring for 19
LEDs 58 Carrier extenders
AO, 8-Channel, 420 mA (HART) specifications 131133 Left and right horizontal carrier extenders 97
465
Index
466
Index
DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Dry Contact specifications 147, Ethernet interface
148 DeltaV Application Station 37
DI, 8-Channel, 230 VAC, Isolated specifications 148, 149 ProfessionalPLUS 37
DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Dry Contact 138140 Ethernet switches 37
DI, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated 142, 143 Explorer, See DeltaV Explorer
Dimensions Extender cables
1-wide VerticalPLUS carrier extender 106 installing 26
2-wide horizontal power/controller carrier 94 Extending system power 377380
4-wide Legacy Vertical power/controller carrier 107 Extension cables
4-wide VerticalPLUS power carrier 103 specifications 96
4-wide VerticalPLUS power/controller carrier 102 External power
8-wide Legacy Vertical I/O interface carrier 108 adding 99
8-wide VerticalPLUS I/O interface carrier 105
H1 carrier 110 F
H1 carrier enclosure 110
Fault-tolerant server
I.S. 8-wide horizontal carrier 113
installing 47
I.S. LocalBus isolator carrier 114
Fiber Switches
I.S. power supply carrier 112
LEDs 54
DIN rail spacing for vertical carriers 426
Fiber-optic cable
DIN rails
specifications 295
installing 16
Fiber-optic cables 38, 39
DO 32-channel cards
Fiber-optic media converters, See Media converters
LEDs 65
Fiber-optic switch
DO 8-channel card
environmental specifications 89
LEDs 64
Fieldbus H1 cards
DO Mass Connection Board 226, 227
LEDs 65
DO Mass Connection Solution 226, 227
Fieldbus H1 carrier
DO, 32-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side specifications 161,
dimensions 110
162
enclosure 110
DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, High-Side
environmental specifications 89
specifications 157, 159
Fieldbus H1 carrier enclosure
DO, 8-Channel, 120 VAC/230 VAC, Isolated
dimensions 110
specifications 159, 161
Fieldbus H1 specifications 163, 164
DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, High-Side specifications 151,
Fieldbus H1 terminal block 197
152, 154
Four Port Fiber Switch
DO, 8-Channel, 24 VDC, Isolated specifications 155157
environmental specifications 89
Documentation
specifications 272, 273
hazardous area 87
FP20 Smart Switch
NAMUR 87
LEDs 80
Download commands 82
ftServer 4500 47, 255
Fused I/O terminal blocks 196, 197
E
Enclosures G
power dissipation 371
GPS network time server
selecting 367
setting up 46
Ethernet cable
Ground isolation 3
installation rules 294
Ground wiring
Ethernet cable specifications 294
for bulk power supply;Bulk power supply:ground
Ethernet cards 255
wiring 43
Ethernet hubs 37
467
Index
468
Index
469
Index
470
Index
471
Index
472
Index
473
Index
474
Index
475